MANUAL

Contents Owner's Handbook
for Vehicle
A-Z The Ultimate

Driving Machine
THE BMW 3 SERIES

TOURING.
OWNER'S HANDBOOK.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 956 728 - X/14

3 Series Owner's Handbook for the vehicle
Congratulations on your choice of a BMW.
The better you are acquainted with your vehicle, the easier you
will find it is to handle. We would therefore like to offer you the
following advice:
Please read the Owner's Handbook before setting out in your
new BMW. Also use the integrated Owner's Handbook in your
vehicle. It contains important information on how to operate the
vehicle, enabling you to derive maximum benefit from the tech‐
nical advantages of your BMW. It also contains useful informa‐
tion which will help you to uphold both your BMW's operating
safety and its full resale value.
Updates to the printed or integrated Owner's Handbook after
going to press are located as needed in the appendix to the
printed quick reference to the vehicle.
Supplementary information is provided in the other documents
of on-board literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable journey,
BMW AG
The Owner's Handbook is available as an app in many coun‐

tries. For more information, visit
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

© 2014 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Not to be reproduced, wholly or in part, without written
permission from BMW AG, Munich.
English X/14, 11 14 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
For quick access to a particular topic or item, Mobility
please consult the detailed alphabetical index, 194 Refuelling
see page 256. 196 Fuel
198 Wheels and tyres
206 Engine compartment
6 Notes
208 Engine oil
Overview 211 Coolant
12 Cockpit 212 Maintenance
16 iDrive 215 Replacing parts
24 Voice control system 227 Help in the event of a breakdown
27 Integrated Owner’s Handbook in the 234 General care
vehicle
Reference
Controls 240 Technical data
32 Opening and closing 256 Everything from A to Z
49 Adjusting
60 Carrying children in safety
67 Driving
80 Displays
97 Lights
103 Security
126 Driving stability control systems
132 Driving comfort
153 Climate
160 Interior equipment
166 Storage compartments
Driving hints
174 Driving precautions
177 Loads
179 Towing a trailer
183 Saving fuel

Notes
Notes
About this Owner's Symbol for components and
assemblies
Handbook
Recommends that you study the relevant
Orientation section of this Owner's Handbook in
connection with a particular part or assembly.
The quickest access to a particular topic or
item is by consulting the alphabetical index.
The first chapter is recommended for an initial
overview of the vehicle.
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Handbook describes all models
Updates after going to press and all standard, national and special equip‐
Updates to the Owner's Handbook after going ment provided in the model series. This Own‐
to press are found in the appendix of the prin‐ er's Handbook therefore also describes and il‐
ted quick reference to the vehicle. lustrates equipment not present in your
vehicle, for example due to selected special
Owner's Handbook for Navigation, equipment and national version.
Entertainment, Communication That also applies to safety-relevant functions
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ and systems.
munication and shortcut commands of the If certain equipment and models are not de‐
voice control system are described in a sepa‐ scribed in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the
rate Owner's Handbook, which is also part of Supplementary Owner's Handbooks provided.
the on-board literature. In right-hand drive vehicles, some of the con‐
trol functions are arranged differently from
those shown in the illustrations.
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of Built-date
personal injury and serious damage to the The 'built-date' of your vehicle is indicated un‐
vehicle. derneath the door post on the driver's door.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of The 'built-date' is defined as 'the calendar
information. month and the calendar year in which the body
Refers to measures that can be taken to shell and the powertrain subassemblies are
help protect the environment. conjoined and the vehicle is driven or moved
"…" identifies texts on a display in the vehicle from the production line'.
for selecting functions.
›...‹ Identifies commands for the voice control
system.
››...‹‹ Identifies replies by the voice control
system.
6
Notes
Status of the Owner's Your own safety

Handbook
Warranty
General Your vehicle is technically designed for the op‐
The high level of safety and quality of vehicles erating conditions and permit requirements
is ensured by continuous enhancement. In rare prevalent in the country to which it was first
instances, your car may therefore differ from delivered - approval. If your vehicle is to be op‐
the information supplied here. erated in another country, it may have to be
adapted to any prevailing different operating
For Australia/New Zealand: general conditions and permit requirements. If your ve‐
hicle does not comply with the homologation
When reading this Owner's Handbook, please
requirements in a certain country you cannot
bear the following in mind: to ensure that our
lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there.
vehicles continue to embody the highest qual‐
Your Service Centre is able to provide further
ity and safety standards, we pursue a policy of
information.
continuous, ongoing development. Because
modifications in the design of both vehicles
Maintenance and repair
and accessories may be introduced at any
time, your own vehicle's equipment may vary Advanced technology behind this vehicle, for
from that described in this manual. For the example the use of modern materials and high-
same reason, it is also impossible to guarantee performance electronics, necessitates adapted
that all descriptions will be completely accu‐ methods of maintenance and repair.
rate in all respects. Always have the corresponding work per‐
We must therefore request your understanding formed either by a BMW Service Centre or by a
of the fact that the manufacturer of your vehi‐ workshop that operates to BMW specifications
cle is unable to recognise legal claims based and has suitably trained personnel.
on discrepancies between the data, illustra‐ If such work is performed inexpertly, it could
tions and descriptions in this Owner's result in consequential damage and thus con‐
Handbook and your own vehicle's equipment. stitute a safety risk.
Please note, too, that some of the optional
equipment described in this manual is not Parts and accessories
available on Australian models due to restric‐ BMW recommends using parts and accessory
tions imposed by Australian Design Rules and products that are specifically approved for this
other requirements. purpose by BMW.
Should you require any further information, You are recommended to consult a BMW
please contact your Service centre, who will be Service Centre for advice on genuine BMW
pleased to advise you. parts and accessories, other BMW approved
products and expert advice on all related mat‐
Updates after going to press ters.
Updates to the Owner's Handbook after going The safety and compatibility of these products
to press are found in the appendix of the prin‐ in conjunction with BMW vehicles have been
ted quick reference to the vehicle. checked by BMW.
BMW accepts product liability for them. BMW
cannot accept liability for parts or accessory
products of any kind which it has not approved.
7
Notes
BMW is unable to assess each individual prod‐ as needed. After rectifying the fault, the infor‐
uct of outside origin as to its suitability for use mation in the fault memory is deleted or con‐
on BMW vehicles without safety risk. Nor can tinuously overwritten.
suitability be assured if an official permit has When using the vehicle, situations are conceiv‐
been issued for it in a specific country. Tests able in which this technical data can be per‐
performed for such permits cannot always sonal in connection with other information, for
cover all operating conditions for BMW vehi‐ example, accident report, damage to the vehi‐
cles, and some of them therefore are insuffi‐ cle, witness statements, etc — possibly by en‐
cient. listing the help of an expert.
Additional functions, contractually agreed with
the customer, for example vehicle location in
Data memory an emergency, allow certain pieces of vehicle
Many of the electronic components of your ve‐ data to be transferred from the vehicle.
hicle contain data memories, which store tech‐
nical information on vehicle condition, events
and errors temporarily or permanently. This Vehicle identification
technical information documents in general the number
condition of a component, a module, a system
or its environment:
▷ Operating states of system components,
for example, fill levels.
▷ Status messages of the vehicle and indi‐
vidual components, for example, wheel ro‐
tation number/ speed, movement retarda‐
tion, transverse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults of important sys‐
tem components, for example, lights and The vehicle identification number is in the en‐
brakes. gine compartment.
▷ Responses of the vehicle to special driving
situations, for example, triggering of an air‐
bag, using the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, for example, tempera‐
ture.
These data are only of a technical nature and
are for detecting and rectifying faults and opti‐
misation of vehicle functions. Movement pro‐
files over driven routes cannot be created from
these data. When servicing, for example, dur‐
ing repairs, service processes, warranty cases
or quality assurance, this technical information
can be read by employees of the service, in‐
cluding the manufacturer, from the event and
fault data memories with special diagnostic
tools. You will receive further information there
8
Notes
9
Overview
This summary of buttons, switches and displays
serves as an initial guide.
In addition, it gives you an insight into the
principles behind the various ways in which
functions can be performed.

Overview Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment therefore also described, for example the se‐
lected special equipment or national version.
This chapter describes all standard, national This also applies to safety-relevant functions
and special equipment provided in the model and systems.
series. Equipment not available in a vehicle is
Around the steering wheel
1 Safety switch for window in rear passenger 5 Lights

compartment 44 Front fog lights 100
2 Power windows 44
3 Exterior mirror operation 57
Rear fog lights 100
4 Glove box on the driver's side 166
Driver assistance systems
Side lights 97
Lane change warning 121
Low-beam headlights 97
Intelligent Safety 111
Lane departure warning 119
12
Cockpit Overview
Automatic driving lights con‐ Increase distance 135

trol 98
Daytime driving lights 98
Paddle for Cruise Control 140, 134
Adaptive Headlights 98
8 Instrument cluster 80
High-beam assistance 99
9 Buttons on steering wheel, right
Instrument lighting 101
Entertainment source
Headlight beam throw adjust‐

ment 99 Volume control
6 Steering-column lever, left

Voice control 24
Turn indicator 72
Telephone, see Owner's

High-beam headlights, headlight Handbook for Navigation, Enter‐
flasher 72 tainment, Communication
High-beam assistance 99 Knurled wheel for selection lists 90
10 Steering-column lever, right
Parking lights 98 Wiper 72
On-board computer 91 Rain sensor 73
Cleaning the windows and head‐

7 Buttons on steering wheel, left
lights 74
Speed limit 122
Rear wipers 74
Resume speed 140, 132

11 Start/stop engine and switch igni‐
tion on/off 68
Cruise Control on/off, inter‐
rupt 139 Auto Start Stop function 69
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐
terrupt 132
12 Horn, total area
Reduce distance 134 13 Steering wheel heating 59
14 Steering wheel adjustment 59

15 Opening the tailgate 38
13
Overview Cockpit
16 Unlock bonnet 206
Around the centre console
1 Control display 16 9 Park Distance Control,

2 Ventilation 158 PDC 140
3 hazard warning lights 227 Rear view camera 143

Park assistant 149
Surround view 143
Central locking system 37
Side View 146

4 Glove box 166
5 CD/Multimedia, see Owner's Handbook for
10 Drive experience switch 128
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication
6 Climate 153
7 Controller with buttons 16 Dynamic Stability Control,
DSC 126
8 Parking brake 71
11 Steptronic transmission selector
lever 75
Manual gearbox selector lever 75
14
Cockpit Overview
Around the headlining
1 Intelligent emergency call 227 4 Reading lights 101
2 Panorama Glass Roof 46 5 Interior light 101
3 Front passenger airbag indicator

lamp 105
15
Overview iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle equipment Control display
This chapter describes all standard, national Information

and special equipment provided in the model
▷ To clean the Control Display, comply with
the information regarding care.
therefore also described, for example the se‐
lected special equipment or national version. ▷ To avoid risk of damage to the Control Dis‐
This also applies to safety-relevant functions play, do not place objects in front of it.
and systems. ▷ At very high temperatures on the Control
Display, for example because of intensive
sunshine, there may be a reduction in
Principle brightness and the Control Display may
even switch itself off. Normal functions will
iDrive integrates the functions of a large num‐ be restored when the temperature is re‐
ber of switches. These functions can thus be duced, for example by shading or using the
controlled from one central point. air conditioning system.
Operate iDrive while the vehicle is in mo‐
tion Switching on
Only make adjustments if the traffic conditions 1. Switch on ignition.
are appropriate. Otherwise, you may become 2. Press the Controller.
distracted and endanger the vehicle occupants
and other road users.◀ Switching off
1. Press the button.

Overview of controls 2. "Switch off control display"
Control functions
Controller with navigation system

1 Control display The buttons can be used to call up menus di‐
2 Controller with buttons and touchpad, de‐ rectly. The Controller can be used to select
pending on equipment menu items and alter settings.
Some of the functions of the iDrive can be op‐
erated with the touchpad of the Controller.
16
iDrive Overview
1. Turning. Press the but‐ Function

ton
TEL Calls up the Telephone

menu.
BACK Displays the previous screen.
OPTION Calls up the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system

2. Pressing. The buttons can be used to call up menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and alter settings.
1. Turning.
3. Tilting in four directions.
2. Pressing.
Buttons on the Controller
Press the but‐ Function

3. Tilting in four directions.
ton
MENU Calls up the main menu.
RADIO Calls up the Radio menu.
MEDIA Calls up the multimedia

menu.
NAV Calls up the Navigation

menu.
17
Overview iDrive
Buttons on the Controller Selecting a menu item

Menu points raised can be selected.
Press the Function
button 1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
MENU Calls up the main menu.
AUDIO Calls up last heard audio

menu, change between audio
menus.
TEL Calls up the Telephone

menu.
BACK Call up previous table.
OPTION Calls up the Options menu.

2. Press the Controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Handbook

Operating principle In this Owner's Handbook, the menu items that
are to be selected are shown in quotation
Calling up the main menu marks, for example "Settings".
Press the button.
Switching between screens
After a menu item has been selected, for ex‐
ample "Radio", a new screen is displayed.
Screens can appear one on top of the other.
▷ Tilt the Controller to the left.
The current screen is closed and the previ‐
ous screen is displayed.
Pressing the BACK button reopens the
previous screen. The current screen is not
closed.
The main menu is displayed.
▷ Tilt the Controller to the right.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
A new screen is opened and overlaid.
main menu.
18
iDrive Overview
White arrows to the left or right indicate that 2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
other screens can be called up. ting is displayed.
View of an opened menu

In general, when a menu is called up, the
screen that was last selected in this menu is
displayed. To display the first screen of the
menu:
▷ Tilt the Controller repeatedly to the left un‐
til the first screen is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the Controller
twice. 3. Press the Controller.
Calling up the Options menu Enabling/disabling functions

Press the button. Some menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. This indicates whether the function is en‐
The "Options" menu is displayed. abled or disabled. Selecting the menu item en‐
ables or disables the function.
Function is enabled.
Function is disabled.
Touchpad
Some of the functions of the iDrive can be op‐
erated with the touchpad of the controller:
Alternatively, tilt the Controller repeatedly to Select functions

the right until the "Options" menu is displayed. 1. "Settings"
2. "Touchpad"
Options menu
3. Select desired functions.
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ "Write": entering letters and digits.
▷ Screen settings, for example "Split
screen". ▷ "Interactive map": operate interactive
card.
Area remains unchanged.
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
▷ Operating options for the selected main
menu, for example for "Radio". ▷ "Audio feedback": the letters and digits
entered are read out.
▷ If applicable, other operating options for
the selected main menu, for example
"Save station".
Entering letters and digits
Entering letters requires a bit of practice to be‐
Adjusting the settings gin with. Pay attention to the following when
entering:
1. Select a field.
19
Overview iDrive
▷ To enter small and capital letters and num‐ Example: setting the clock
bers, it may be necessary to change input
mode, see page 23, for example, when Setting the clock
identically writing small and capital letters.
On the Control Display:
▷ Enter symbols as they are displayed on the
control display.
1. Press the button. The main menu is
▷ Relevant symbols, such as accents or full displayed.
stops, for example, are always known am‐
2. Turn the Controller until "Settings" is high‐
biguously with the letter. Options to input
lighted and press the Controller.
these depends on the language set. You
may need to enter special characters using
the controller.
▷ To delete a character, stroke the touchpad
towards the left.
▷ To enter a space, stroke towards the right
in the middle of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, stroke towards the right
in the upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, stroke towards 3. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the left to
the right in the upper area of the touchpad. display "Time/date".
4. Turn the Controller until "Time/date" is
Operating interactive map and
highlighted and press the Controller.
Internet
The Interactive map of the navigation system
and websites can be moved using the touch‐
pad.
Function Controls
Move interactive map or Gesture in the ap‐

web pages. propriate direction.
Enlarge/reduce interac‐ Pinch or open up

tive map or web pages. your fingers on the
5. Turn the Controller until "Time:" is high‐
touchpad.
lighted and press the Controller.
Show menu or open a Tap once.
link on the Internet.
Adjusting the settings

Settings on the control display, such as vol‐
ume, for example, can be made using the
touchpad. To do this gesture left or right as ap‐
propriate.
20
iDrive Overview
6. Turn the Controller to set the hour and Symbol Meaning

press the Controller.
Data transfer active.
7. Turn the Controller to set the minutes and
press the Controller. Roaming active.
Text message received.

Status information SIM card check.
Status field SIM card disabled.

The following items of information are dis‐ SIM card not found.
played in the status field on the top right:
PIN required.
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
Symbols for entertainment
▷ Sound output on/off.
▷ Reception level of mobile telephone net‐ Symbol Meaning
work.
CD/DVD player.
▷ Phone status.
▷ Reception of traffic reports. Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
Symbols in the status field
The symbols are combined in the following AUX-IN port
groups. USB audio interface.
Symbols for radio Audio interface for mobile phone.
Symbol Meaning Other functions

TP Traffic Information switched on.
Symbol Meaning
Symbols for telephone Spoken instructions switched off.
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call. Split-screen

Missed call. General
Reception level of mobile telephone In the split-screen view, additional information
network. can be displayed on the right-hand side of the
screen, for example information from the on-
Symbol flashes: network search.
board computer.
No mobile phone network available. This information remains visible in the split-
Bluetooth switched on. screen view even if a switch is made to another
menu.
21
Overview iDrive
Switching the split-screen view on Saving a function

and off 1. Highlight the function using the iDrive.
1. Press the button. 2. Press and hold the required button

2. "Split screen" until a signal sounds.
Selecting display Performing a function

Press the button.
The function is carried out immedi‐
2. "Split screen"
ately. If you have selected a telephone number,
3. Tilt the Controller until the split-screen is for example, the connection will also be estab‐
selected. lished.
4. Press the Controller or select "Split screen
content" Displaying assignment of buttons
5. Select the desired menu item. Touch the buttons with your finger. Do not
wear gloves or use objects.
The assignment of the buttons is displayed at
the top edge of the screen.
Favourites buttons
General
Clearing assignment of buttons
iDrive functions can be saved on the favourites
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
buttons and called up directly, for example
approximately five seconds.
radio stations, navigation destinations, tele‐
phone numbers and shortcuts into the menu. 2. "OK"
The settings are stored for the currently used

profile.
Deleting personal data in
Without navigation system and vehicle
telephone
Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐
Principle
tons, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Vehicle stores personal data, depending on
Entertainment and Communication. how it is used, such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently deleted
using iDrive.
22
iDrive Overview
General Symbol Function

Following data can be deleted, depending on
Press the Controller: deletes a letter
equipment:
or digit.
▷ Personal Profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations. Press and hold down the Controller:
deletes all numbers or letters.
▷ Stored favourite buttons.
▷ Trip and on-board computer values.
Change between upper/lower case,
▷ Music collection. numbers and symbols
▷ Navigation, for example stored destina‐ Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tions. tween the input of lower case or upper case
▷ Phone book. letters, numbers and symbols:
▷ Online data, for example favourites, cook‐ Symbol Function
ies.
Enter letters.
▷ Voice memos.
▷ Login accounts. Enter digits.
▷ RemoteApp smartphone pairing. or Tilt the Controller up.
It can take up to 30 minutes in total to delete
data. Without navigation system
Select the symbol.
Operating requirements
Data can only be deleted at a standstill. Entry comparison
Input of names and addresses: the selection is
Deleting data
gradually narrowed down and possibly supple‐
Follow the instructions on the Control Display. mented with every subsequent letter that you
1. Switch on ignition. enter.
2. "Settings" Inputs are continuously compared with the
data saved in the vehicle.
3. Calling up "Options".
▷ Only letters that are present in the data is
4. "Delete personal data"
offered for entry.
5. "Continue"
▷ Destination search: place names can be
6. "OK" entered in the writing of any language
available on the Control Display.
Entering letters and digits

General
1. Turn Controller and select letters or digits.

2. If applicable, select other letters or digits.
3. Select "OK" to confirm the input.
23
Overview Voice control system
Voice control system

Vehicle equipment 3. Issue the command.
Command detected by voice control sys‐
This chapter describes all standard, national
tem is announced and displayed in instru‐
ment cluster.
therefore also described, for example the se‐ Symbol in the instrument cluster indicates
lected special equipment or national version. that the voice control system is active.
This also applies to safety-relevant functions If no further spoken commands are possible,
and systems. switch to iDrive to control the function in this
case.
Principle Switching off the voice control system

▷ Through the voice control system most Press the button on the steering
functions shown in the Control Display can wheel or say ›Cancel‹.
be operated by spoken commands. The
system supports spoken input.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the Possible commands
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated via
the voice control system. Most of the menu items on the control display
can be called up by means of spoken com‐
▷ The system has a special microphone on
mands.
the driver's side.
The possible commands depend on which
▷ ›...‹ Indicates commands for the voice con‐
menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
trol system in the Owner's Handbook.
play.
For various functions there are short com‐
mands.
Requirements
Several list entries, for example, telephone
On the control display set a language that is book entries, can also be selected using the
also supported by the voice control system, so voice control system. When doing this, list en‐
that the vehicle can identify spoken com‐ tries are to be spoken exactly as they are
mands. shown in the relevant list.
Setting the language, see page 94.
Having possible commands read aloud
Possible commands can be read aloud: ›Voice
Issuing voice commands commands‹.
If, for example, the menu "Settings" is dis‐
Activating the voice control system played, the commands for the settings are an‐
nounced.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for acoustic signal.
24
Voice control system Overview
Running functions using short

commands 2. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Main menu functions can be performed imme‐
diately using short commands, almost irre‐ 3. ›Sound‹
spective of which menu item is selected, for
example ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice control Setting the speech dialogue
system, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, You can set whether the system uses the
Entertainment and Communication. standard dialogue or the short variant,
With the short variants of the speech dialogue,
Help dialogue to voice control system the system announcements are played in
Call up help dialogue: ›Help‹. shortened form.
Further commands for help dialogue:
1. "Settings"
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information on the
2. "Language/units"
current possible operations and the most
important commands for this are read out. 3. "Voice contr.:"
▷ ›Help with voice input‹: information on the 4. Select the setting.
operating principle of the voice control sys‐
tem is read out.
An example: call up sound

settings
Using main menu
Commands on the menu are read out so they
can also be selected using the controller.
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment au‐ Adjusting volume

dio output.
Turn the volume knob during the voice instruc‐
2. Press the button on the steering tions until the desired volume is obtained.
wheel. ▷ The volume is retained even if you change
3. ›Radio‹ the volume of other audio sources.
4. ›Sound‹ ▷ The volume is stored for the currently used
profile.
Through short command
Desired sound setting can also be started us‐
ing a shortcut. Information regarding
emergency calls
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment au‐
dio output. The voice control system should not be used
for emergency calls. Under stress, the spoken
language and voice pitch can change, which
25
Overview Voice control system
could unnecessarily delay the connection of

your call.
Instead, use the SOS button, see page 227, in
the area of the interior mirror.
Operating conditions
▷ Commands, digits and letters should be
pronounced fluently, with the usual em‐
phasis, and at a normal volume and speed.
▷ Always speak the commands in the lan‐
guage of the voice control system.
▷ When selecting the radio station, use the
customary pronunciation of the station
name as it is displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
›Station ...‹, for example, Classic Radio sta‐
tion.
▷ Doors, windows and the Glass Roof should
be kept closed to avoid noise interference.
▷ Avoid background noises in the vehicle
while you are speaking.
26
Integrated Owner’s Handbook in the vehicle Overview
Integrated Owner’s Handbook in the

vehicle
Vehicle equipment Owner's Handbook
Here, information and descriptions can be
searched via the index by directly entering a
search term.
Selecting components
This also applies to safety-relevant functions
and systems.
2. Turn the Controller and select "Vehicle
information".
Integrated Owner’s 3. Press the Controller.
Handbook in the vehicle 4. Select desired area:
The integrated Owner's Handbook can be ▷ "Quick reference"
shown in the control display. It particularly de‐ ▷ "Picture search"
scribes the equipment and functions present ▷ "Owner's Handbook"
in the vehicle.
Components of the integrated

Owner's Handbook
The integrated Owner's Handbook consists of
three parts, which provide various levels of in‐
formation or access possibilities.
Quick Reference
Important information is found in the quick ref‐
erence for the operation of the vehicle, the op‐ Browsing within the Owner’s
eration of fundamental vehicle functions or in Handbook
case of breakdown. This information can also
be displayed when driving. Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
Search by pictures
page is displayed.
Using the search by pictures, information and
descriptions can be searched using pictures. Page by page without link access
For example, this is particularly helpful when
Browse the pages directly, skipping links.
the description of a piece of equipment is nee‐
ded, which cannot be named. Highlight the symbol once. Then simply press
the controller to browse from page to page.
27
Overview Integrated Owner’s Handbook in the vehicle
Browse back.
4. Press the button again to switch back
to the last displayed function.
Browse forward.
5. Press the button again to switch back
to the last displayed page of the Owner's
Handbook.
Context-sensitive help - Owner's
To switch continuously between the last dis‐
Handbook for the currently selected
played function and the last displayed page of
function
the Owner's Handbook, repeat steps 4 and 5.
Suitable information can be displayed directly. As you do so, new screens are opened.
Calling up with iDrive operation Favourites buttons

Switch to the Options menu directly from the
application on the Control Display: General
The Owner's Handbook can be stored in the
1. Press the button or tilt the Controller favourite buttons and called up directly.
repeatedly to the right until the "Options"
menu appears. Saving
2. "Show Owner's Handbook" 1. Select "Owner's Handbook" using the
iDrive.
Calling up with display of a check
control message 2. Press the desired button for longer
Directly from the check control message on than two seconds.
the Control Display:
Use
"Show Owner's Handbook"
Press the button.
Switching between function and The Owner's Handbook is displayed
Owner's Handbook immediately.
You can use the Control Display to switch from
a function, for example radio, to the Owner's
Handbook, and then back and forth between
the two displays:
1. Press the button or tilt the Controller

repeatedly to the right until the "Options"
menu appears.
2. "Show Owner's Handbook"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Handbook.
28
Integrated Owner’s Handbook in the vehicle Overview
29
Controls
This chapter enables you to operate your car
with greater ease, explaining in detail the
features designed to make your journey safer,
more comfortable and more enjoyable.

Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle equipment Overview

and systems.
Remote control/keys 1 Unlocking

2 Locking
General
3 Opening/closing tailgate
The delivery specification includes two remote
controls with integrated keys.
Integrated key
Every remote control contains a replaceable
battery.
The functions of buttons may be set depend‐
ing on equipment and national version. Set‐
tings, see page 42.
For each remote control, personal settings are
stored in the vehicle. Personal profile, see
page 33.
Further information on servicing is also stored
in the remote controls Service data in the re‐
Press the button on the back of the remote
mote control, see page 212.
control, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Glove box on the passenger side.
32
Opening and closing Controls
Replacing the battery ▷ Fault in radio transmission due to the

charger when charging in the vehicle, for
example for mobile devices.
If an attempt is made to switch on the ignition
or start the engine, a check control message is
displayed.
Starting engine with special ID of

remote control
1. Remove the integrated key from the re‐

mote control.
2. Push in catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover for the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 2.
4. Insert a new battery of the same type with
the positive side facing upwards.
5. Press the cover back into position. Steptronic transmission: with the relevant
Dispose of the old battery at an author‐ check control message, hold the remote con‐
ised collecting point or hand it in to a trol, as illustrated, to the mark on the steering
Service Centre. column and press the start/stop button within
10 seconds with the brake depressed.
Manual gearbox: with the relevant check con‐
New remote controls
trol message, hold the remote control, as illus‐
New remote controls can be obtained form the trated, to the mark on the steering column and
Service centre. press the start/stop button within 10 seconds
with the clutch depressed.
Loss of remote controls
If the remote control is not detected: change
A lost remote control can be blocked by the the height of the remote control slightly and
Service Centre. repeat the procedure.
Special ID of the remote control

The ignition can be switched on or the engine
started even in one of the following situations:
Personal Profile
▷ Interference in the radio transmission to Principle
the remote control from external sources,
Individual settings in the vehicle are stored in
for example by radio masts.
personal profiles. The most recently active
▷ Flat battery in the remote control. profile is assigned to each remote control.
▷ Fault in radio transmission due to mobile Three personal profiles and a guest profile can
radio device in the immediate vicinity of the be created.
remote control.
▷ Changes to settings are saved automati‐
cally in the currently activated profile.
33
▷ When unlocking, the personal profile 3. Select a profile.

stored for the remote control is activated. The profile called up is assigned to the remote
▷ Personal settings are also found and called control currently used.
up if the vehicle has been driven in the
meantime by another remote control. Renaming profiles
1. "Settings"
Settings
2. "Profiles"
Settings for the following systems and func‐
3. "Options"
tions are saved in the active profile. The extent
of settings that can be stored depends on the 4. "Rename current profile"
country and equipment.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
Resetting profiles
Settings of the active profile are reset to fac‐
▷ Light.
tory settings.
▷ Air conditioning.
1. "Settings"
▷ Radio.
2. "Profiles"
▷ Instrument cluster.
3. "Options"
▷ Favourites buttons.
4. "Reset current profile"
▷ Volumes, sound.
▷ Control display. Exporting profiles
▷ Navigation. Most settings of the active profile and the
▷ TV. saved contacts can be exported.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC. This may be useful for securing and calling up
▷ Rear-view camera. personal settings, for example, before taking
the vehicle into a Service Centre. The saved
▷ Side view.
profiles can be taken to another vehicle with
▷ Head-Up Display. the Personal Profile function.
▷ Drive experience switch. The following options are available for export:
▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐ ▷ Via BMW Online.
tion, steering wheel position.
▷ Via USB interface to a USB medium.
▷ Cruise Control.
Common file systems for USB media are
▷ Intelligent Safety. supported. FAT32 and exFAT formats are
▷ Lane change warning. recommended for exporting profiles, ex‐
port might not be possible with other for‐
Profile management mats.
1. "Settings"
Calling up profiles 2. "Profiles"
Independently of the remote control that is
3. "Export profile"
used, another profile can be called up.
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
1. "Settings"
USB interface: "USB device"
2. "Profiles"
34
Importing profiles With the remote control

Profiles exported via BMW Online can be im‐
ported via BMW Online. Note
Profiles saved on a USB medium can be im‐ Removing the remote control
ported using the USB interface.
Persons remaining in the car or pets left
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten inside can lock the doors from the inside. You
with the imported profile. should therefore take the remote control with
you when you get out of the vehicle so that the
1. "Settings"
car can be opened from the outside.◀
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile" Unlocking
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
Press the button on the remote con‐
USB interface: "USB device" trol.
Using a guest profile ▷ All the doors and the tailgate are unlocked.
With the guest profile, individual settings can ▷ Interior light and courtesy light are
be made which are not saved in any of the switched on. This function is not available
three personal profiles. if the interior light was switched off man‐
This can be beneficial if a driver without their ually.
own profile uses the vehicle temporarily. ▷ The welcome light is switched on if this
function was activated.
1. "Settings"
▷ Exterior mirrors folded in using comfort
2. "Profiles"
closing are folded out.
3. "Guest"
You can set how the vehicle is unlocked. Set‐
Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed. It is tings, see page 42.
assigned to the current remote control.
Anti-theft system is switched off.
Showing profile list at start The alarm system, see page 43, is disarmed.
The profile list can be shown at the start to se‐

Comfort opening
lect the desired profile.
Keep the button on the remote control
1. "Settings" pressed after unlocking.
2. "Profiles"
The windows and Glass Roof are opened for as
3. "Options"
long as the button on the remote control is
4. "Profile list at start" pressed.
Locking
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there is someone inside it, as it cannot
then be unlocked from the inside in some na‐
tional-market versions.◀
35
Press the button on the remote control. available on opening the tailgate, as otherwise
damage can occur.◀
All the doors and tailgate are locked.
Press the button on the remote con‐
Anti-theft system is switched on. It prevents trol for approximately one second.
the doors from being able to be unlocked using
the locking buttons or the door openers. The closed tailgate opens automatically, re‐
The alarm system, see page 43, is armed. gardless of whether the vehicle is locked or un‐
locked. To close opened tailgate, press and
Comfort closing hold button of remote control until tailgate is
closed.
Keep the button on the remote control
Depending on the equipment and country ver‐
pressed after locking.
sion it can be set whether the doors are also
The windows and the Glass Roof are closed for locked. Adjust the settings, see page 42.
as long as the button on the remote control is In some equipment versions, doors are also
pressed. unlocked if appropriate
Exterior mirrors are folded in. If the doors were not unlocked, the tailgate is
With the hazard warning lights switched on, locked again as soon as it is closed.
the exterior mirror is not folded in. Do not lay the remote control in the boot
Follow the closing operation Keep the remote control with you at all
Follow closing operation and ensure that times and do not lay it in the boot, as otherwise
nobody gets jammed.◀ there is a risk of the remote control being
locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is
closed.◀
Switching on interior light and
courtesy light Protect edges.
With the vehicle locked, press the button Sharp objects or those with sharp edges
on the remote control. may knock against the rear window while the
vehicle is in motion and damage the heating
This function is not available if the interior light conductor of the rear window. Protect edges.◀
was switched off manually.
If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐ Malfunction
onds of locking, passenger compartment pro‐
Detection of the remote control by the vehicle
tection and tilt alarm sensor of alarm system,
may be disrupted by the following circumstan‐
see page 44, are switched off. After locking,
ces, amongst others:
wait 10 seconds before pressing the button
again. ▷ Disruption of the radio link by transmission
masts or other equipment transmitting
Opening and closing tailgate powerful signals.
Pay attention to the opening height of ▷ Shielding of the remote control by metallic
the tailgate objects.
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards ▷ Disruption of the radio link by mobile tele‐
when opened. Make sure enough space is phones or other electronic devices in the
immediate vicinity.
36
Do not transport the remote control together special ID of the remote control, see page 33,
with metallic objects or electronic devices. as necessary.
If there is a malfunction, the vehicle can also be
unlocked and locked from the outside without From inside
remote control, see page 37.
Unlocking and locking
Without remote control

From outside
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there is someone inside it, as it cannot
then be unlocked from the inside in some na‐
tional-market versions.◀
Press button for central locking to lock or un‐
Removing the key before pulling the door lock vehicle when front doors are closed.
handle
Locking does not activate anti-theft protection
To avoid damage to the paint and key, always
for vehicle.
remove the key before pulling the outer door
handle.◀ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
In the event of an accident of a given severity,
the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The haz‐
ard warning system and interior lights illumi‐
nate.
Unlocking and opening
Unlock or lock the driver's door using the

integrated key, see page 32, in the door lock.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system ▷ Press button for central locking to unlock

The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is doors together and then pull door opener
locked with the integrated key. above armrest.
Alarm system is triggered if the vehicle has ▷ Pull twice on door opener on door to be
been unlocked using the door lock. opened: first pull unlocks door, second pull
To end this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the opens door. The other doors remain
remote control or turn on the ignition, with locked.
37
Tailgate ▷ Press the button on the remote

control for approximately one sec‐
Automatic operation of the tailgate ond.
Doors are also unlocked if appropriate.
Adjusting the opening height Opening with remote control, see page 36.
The extent to which the tailgate opens can be ▷ Press the button in the driver's
set. footwell.
Adjusting the opening height When the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate
opens automatically up to the set opening
When setting the opening height, make
height.
sure that there is a space of at least 10 cm, 4 in
above the tailgate. Otherwise, for example, if The opening procedure is interrupted:
the load status has changed, the ceiling height ▷ When a button is pressed again.
might not be sufficient for the opened tail‐
▷ When starting the engine.
gate.◀
▷ If the vehicle begins to move.
1. "Settings"
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
2. "Tailgate" tailgate.
3. Turn the controller until the desired open‐
ing height is reached. Closing
Keep lock area clear
Opening
To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing
Pay attention to the opening height of area of the tailgate is unobstructed.◀
the tailgate
Follow the closing operation
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards
when opened. Make sure enough space is Follow closing operation and ensure that
available on opening the tailgate, as otherwise nobody gets jammed.◀
damage can occur.
Do not lay the remote control in the boot
Depending on the situation, set the opening
Keep the remote control with you at all
height for the tailgate.◀
times and do not lay it in the boot, as otherwise
there is a risk of the remote control being
closed.◀
Protect edges.
Sharp objects or those with sharp edges
may knock against the rear window while the
conductor of the rear window. Protect edges.◀
▷ Press the button on the outside of the tail‐ Without Comfort Access:
gate.
38
▷ Press the button on the inside of the tail‐ ▷ Press the button on the outside of the tail‐
gate. gate.
Pressing the button again stops the move‐
With Comfort Access:
ment.
▷ Keep button pressed on remote

control until tailgate has closed.
Releasing the button stops the movement.
The tailgate closes.
The shutdown process is interrupted:
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ When driving off suddenly.
▷ Press button on inside of tailgate, arrow 1.
Manual operation
Pressing the button again stops the move‐
ment. Do not operate a blocked tailgate man‐
▷ Press the button, arrow 2. ually
The vehicle is locked after the tailgate has If the tailgate is blocked, do not operate it man‐
been closed. To do this, the driver's door ually as otherwise the tailgate could become
must be closed and the remote control damaged and can cause injury.
must be outside the vehicle in the vicinity Contact a Service centre.◀
of the tailgate.
In the case of an electrical defect, operate the
Pressing the button again stops the move‐ unlocked tailgate manually, proceeding slowly
ment. and avoiding sudden movements.
Opening and closing rear window

Opening the rear window on its own provides
easy access for loading and unloading small
items.
39
▷ To lock, the remote control must be loca‐

ted outside the vehicle.
▷ Approximately 2 seconds need to elapse
before the vehicle can be unlocked and
locked again.
▷ An engine start is only possible if the re‐
mote control is in the vehicle.
Unlocking
Press the button on the rear window.
The rear window opens a little and can be tilted
upwards.
To close: press the rear window closed.
Protect edges.
Sharp objects or those with sharp edges
may knock against the rear window while the
conductor of the rear window. Protect edges.◀
Firmly grab the handle on the driver's or front
passenger's door, arrow.
Comfort Access This corresponds to pressing the button

on the remote control.
Principle
Access to the vehicle is possible without acti‐ Locking
vating the remote control.
It is sufficient to have the remote control on
your person, for example in a trouser pocket.
The vehicle automatically recognises the re‐
mote control when it is in the immediate vicin‐
ity or inside the vehicle.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking the vehicle.
Use your finger to touch area on door handle of
▷ Comfort closing. driver's or front passenger's door for approxi‐
▷ Unlocking the tailgate separately. mately 1 second, without gripping door handle.
▷ Start the engine. This corresponds to pressing the button
on the remote control.
Operating requirements To reduce the burden on the vehicle battery,
▷ No external sources of interference in the make sure that the ignition and all electrical
vicinity. consumers are switched off prior to locking.
40
Comfort closing Opening and closing tailgate

Follow the closing operation
contactlessly
Two sensors detect a foot movement forwards
Follow closing operation and ensure that
in the rear area and the tailgate opens.
nobody gets jammed.◀
Foot movement to be undertaken

Do not touch the vehicle
With the foot movement ensure that you
are standing firmly and do not touch the vehi‐
cle, otherwise there is a risk of injury, for exam‐
ple, due to hot exhaust parts.◀
1. Stand in the centre behind the vehicle, ap‐
proximately an arm's length away from the
Use your finger to touch area on door handle of rear of the vehicle.
driver's or front passenger's door and keep 2. A foot must move as far as possible under
your finger there without gripping door handle. the vehicle in the direction of travel and be
This corresponds to pressing and holding withdrawn again immediately. In this move‐
button of remote control. ment, the leg must pass through the range
of both sensors.
In addition to locking, windows and Glass Roof
are closed and exterior mirrors are folded in.
Opening tailgate individually

Press the button on the outside of the tailgate.
This corresponds to pressing the but‐
ton on the remote control.
Status of doors does not change.
Pay attention to the opening height of
the tailgate Opening
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it
when opened. Make sure enough space is was locked or unlocked.
available on opening the tailgate, as otherwise
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards
damage can occur.◀
when opened. Make sure that there is suffi‐
Do not lay the remote control in the boot cient clearance.
Keep the remote control with you at all The hazard warning system flashes before
times and do not lay it in the boot, as otherwise opening.
there is a risk of the remote control being Avoiding unintentional opening
In situations in which the tailgate cannot
closed.◀
be opened contactlessly, ensure that the re‐
mote control is outside the sensor range, at
least 1.50 m, 5 ft from the rear area.
41
Otherwise the tailgate may open unintention‐ ▷ Disruption of the radio link by mobile tele‐
ally due to an inadvertent or wrongly detected phones or other electronic devices in the
foot movement.◀ immediate vicinity.
Do not transport the remote control together
Closing with metallic objects or electronic devices.
The warning indicator flashes and an audible In case of a fault, unlock and lock the vehicle
signal sounds before the tailgate closes. with the buttons on the remote control or with
The tailgate swings rearwards and downwards the integrated key, see page 37.
when closing.
Closing the tailgate has no effect on locking
the vehicle. Settings
The locking mechanism may be interrupted Unlocking
due to a new foot movement.
Settings are saved in active profile, see
Avoid inadvertent closing page 33.
In situations in which opened tailgate
should not be closed contactlessly, ensure Doors
that remote control is outside sensor range, at 1. "Settings"
least 1.50 m, 5 ft from rear area.
2. "Doors/key"
Otherwise tailgate may close unintentionally
3. Select the symbol.
due to an inadvertent or wrongly detected foot
movement.◀ 4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Keep lock area clear
Only the driver's door and fuel filler flap
To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
area of the tailgate is unobstructed.◀ the entire vehicle.
Do not lay the remote control in the boot ▷ "All doors"
Keep the remote control with you at all The entire vehicle is unlocked.
times and do not lay it in the boot, as otherwise
there is a risk of the remote control being Tailgate
locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is Depending on the equipment and country ver‐
closed.◀ sion, these settings are not provided.
1. "Settings"
Malfunction
2. "Doors/key"
Detection of the remote control by the vehicle
may be disrupted by the following circumstan‐
ces, amongst others: 4. Select the desired function:
▷ Disruption of the radio link by transmission ▷ "Tailgate"
masts or other equipment transmitting Tailgate is opened.
powerful signals.
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"
▷ Shielding of the remote control by metallic
Tailgate is opened and doors are un‐
objects.
locked.
42
Acknowledgement signal of the Enabling setting

vehicle 1. "Settings"
Settings are saved in active profile, see 2. "Doors/key"
page 33.
3. "Last seat position autom."
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. "Turn signals for lock/unl." Alarm system
Automatic locking Principle

The alarm system is triggered when the vehi‐
Settings are saved in active profile, see
cle is locked if:
page 33.
▷ A door, the bonnet or the tailgate or rear
1. "Settings" window is opened.
2. "Doors/key" ▷ Movements in the interior.
3. Select the desired function: ▷ The vehicle's incline changes, for instance
▷ "Automatic relock" if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal
The vehicle is locked automatically af‐ the wheels or to raise it prior to towing
ter a short while if no door is opened. away.
▷ "Lock after driving away" ▷ There is an interruption in the power sup‐
ply from the battery.
On driving off, the vehicle is locked au‐
tomatically. The alarm system will respond briefly to unau‐
thorised attempts to access the vehicle as fol‐
Calling up seat, mirror setting lows:
The last adjusted driver's seat and exterior mir‐ ▷ Acoustic alarm.
ror position is stored for the currently used re‐ ▷ Switching on the hazard warning lights.
mote control.
When the vehicle is unlocked, this position is Arming and disarming
called up automatically if the function has been At the same time as unlocking and locking the
enabled. vehicle by remote control or Comfort Access
the alarm system is also disarmed or armed.
Risk of jamming when the seat moves
back
Door lock with alarm system armed
If this function is used, first ensure that the
Alarm system is deactivated if the vehicle is
footwell behind the driver's seat is clear. Oth‐
unlocked using the door lock.
erwise, with any moving back of the seat peo‐
ple could be injured or objects be damaged.◀
Tailgate with alarm system armed
Adjustment procedure is interrupted: The tailgate can be opened even with the
▷ By operating the switch or the seat adjust‐ alarm system armed.
ment. On closing the tailgate, it is locked again and
▷ By touching a button of the seat and mirror monitored, as long as the doors are locked.
memory. The hazard warning system flashes once.
43
Indicator light on the rear-view mirror Avoiding false alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and interior movement
detector can be switched off together, for ex‐
ample in the following situations:
▷ In car washes.
▷ In two-level garages.
▷ During transport via motorail, car ferry or
trailer.
▷ When there are animals in the vehicle.
▷ Indicator light flashes every 2 seconds:
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
System is armed. interior movement detector
▷ Indicator light flashes after locking:
Press the button on the remote control
Doors, bonnet, tailgate or rear window are again within 10 seconds, as soon as the
not properly closed; the rest is secured. vehicle is locked.
After ten seconds, the indicator light The indicator light illuminates for approxi‐
flashes continuously. Interior protection mately 2 seconds and then flashes again.
and tilt alarm sensor are not active.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior move‐
If the access that is still open is closed then ment detector are switched off until the next
the interior protection and tilt alarm sensor time the car is locked.
are switched on.
▷ The indicator light no longer illuminates af‐ Switching off the alarm
ter the vehicle has been unlocked:
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
No attempt has been made to tamper with or switch on the ignition, if necessary using
the vehicle. special ID of remote control, see page 33.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking ▷ For Comfort Access: Completely grasp ei‐
until the ignition is switched on, but for no ther front door handle when carrying re‐
longer than approximately five minutes: mote control.
The alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor Power windows

The incline of the vehicle is monitored.
General
Alarm system responds, for example, when
there is an attempt to steel a wheel or when Removing the remote control
towing away. Take the remote control with you when
you leave the vehicle, otherwise children, for
Interior movement detector example, could operate the power windows
To ensure perfect functioning, the windows and possibly injure themselves.◀
and Glass Roof must be closed.
44
See also: closing using Comfort Access, see

page 40.
After switching off the ignition

Windows can still be operated:
▷ For some time with radio readiness
switched on.
▷ For approximately one minute with the ig‐
nition switched off.
Opening
Anti-trap mechanism
▷ Push the switch as far as the resist‐ Danger of trapping despite anti-trap
ance point. mechanism
The window opens as long as the switch is Despite the anti-trap mechanism, make sure
held. that the windows are not obstructed as they
close; if this precaution is not taken, the risk re‐
▷ Push the switch past the resistance mains that thin objects, for instance, could fail
point. to interrupt the closing movement.◀
The window opens automatically. The
No accessories on windows
movement is stopped by pressing the
switch again. Do not attach any accessories in the
movement range of the windows, as otherwise
See also: Comfort opening, see page 35, by
the anti-trap mechanism will be impaired.◀
remote control.
If the closing power exceeds a certain value on
Closing closing a window, the closing operation is in‐
Keeping closing zone clear terrupted.
To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing The window opens again slightly.
area of the window is unobstructed during
closing.◀ Closing without the anti-trap
mechanism
▷ Pull the switch as far as the resist‐ Keeping closing zone clear
ance point. To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing
The window closes as long as the switch is area of the window is unobstructed during
held. closing.◀
If an external hazard or ice does not allow you

▷ Pull the switch past the resistance to close the windows normally, proceed as fol‐
point. lows:
The window closes automatically. Pulling
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
the switch again stops the movement.
and hold it there.
See also: Comfort closing, see page 36, by re‐
The anti-trap mechanism is restricted and
mote control.
the window opens slightly when the clos‐
ing force exceeds a certain value.
45
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point Panorama Glass Roof
again within approximately four seconds
and hold it there. General
The window closes without the anti-trap The Glass Roof and the sun blind can be oper‐
mechanism. ated separately or together with the same
switch.
Safety switch
Keeping closing zone clear
General To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing
The safety switch can be used to prevent chil‐ area of the glass roof is unobstructed during
dren from opening and closing the rear win‐ closing.◀
dows by means of the switches in the rear, for
Removing the remote control
example.
Take the remote control with you when
Switching on and off you leave the vehicle, otherwise children could
operate the Glass Roof and possibly injure
Press the button. themselves.◀
When the safety function is switched
on, the LED is illuminated.
Safety switch for rear operation

Press the safety switch when carrying
children in the rear seats, otherwise careless
closing of the windows could result in injury.◀
Roller sunblinds
Raising the Glass Roof
Roller sunblinds for rear side windows
Press the top of the switch.
Pull the roller sunblind out with the loop and
hang into the holder. ▷ From the closed position,
the Glass Roof is raised and
Do not open the window if the roller sun‐ the sun blind opens slightly.
blind has been pulled up
▷ The opened Glass Roof
Do not open the window when the roller sun‐ closes to the raised position.
blind has been pulled up, otherwise there is a The sun blind does not
risk of damage and subsequently injury at high move.
speeds.◀
46
Opening/closing the Glass Roof and Comfort position

sun blind separately If Glass Roof is not completely opened by au‐
▷ Push and hold the switch in tomatic function, this means comfort position
the desired direction as far has been reached. In this position, wind noise
as the resistance point. inside vehicle is at lowest level.
The sun blind opens as long You can continue the movement by subse‐
as the switch is held. The quently pressing the button.
Glass Roof opens if the sun
blind is already completely After switching off the ignition
opened. The Glass Roof can still be opened or closed
The Glass Roof closes as for approximately 1 minute after the ignition
long as the switch is held. If has been switched off.
the Glass Roof is already
closed or is in the raised po‐ Anti-trap mechanism
sition, the sun blind closes. If the closing power of the Glass Roof exceeds
▷ Push the switch beyond the resistance a certain value, the closing operation is inter‐
point in the desired direction. rupted from approximately the half-open posi‐
tion, or during closing from the raised position.
The sun blind opens automatically. The
Glass Roof opens automatically if the sun The Glass Roof opens again slightly.
blind is already completely opened. Danger of trapping despite anti-trap
The Glass Roof closes automatically. If the mechanism
Glass Roof is already closed or is in the Despite the anti-trap mechanism, make sure
raised position, the sun blind closes auto‐ that the Glass Roof is not obstructed as it
matically. closes; if this precaution is not taken, the risk
Movement is stopped by pressing switch remains that thin objects, for instance, could
upwards. fail to interrupt the closing movement.◀
Opening and closing the Glass Roof Closing without anti-trap mechanism
and sun blind together from open position
Push the switch twice in rapid In the event of danger from outside, for exam‐
succession beyond the resist‐ ple, proceed as follows:
ance point in the desired direc‐ 1. Slide the switch forwards beyond the re‐
tion. sistance point and hold it there.
The Glass Roof and the sun The anti-trap mechanism is restricted and
blind open together. Movement is stopped by the Glass Roof opens slightly when the
pressing switch upwards. closing force exceeds a certain value.
▷ See also: Comfort opening, see page 35, 2. Press the switch forwards once again be‐
and comfort closing, see page 36, by re‐ yond the resistance point and hold until the
mote control. Glass Roof closes without the anti-trap
mechanism. Ensure that the closing area is
▷ See also: closing using Comfort Access,
clear.
see page 40.
47
Closing without anti-trap mechanism

from raised position
If there is a risk from the outside slide the
switch forwards beyond the resistance point
and hold it there.
The Glass Roof closes without the anti-trap
mechanism.
Initialising after power failure

The Glass Roof functions may be restricted af‐
ter a power cut during the opening or closing
process.
Initialising the system

The system can be initialised when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialisation the Glass Roof closes
without the anti-trap mechanism.
Keeping closing zone clear
area of the glass roof is unobstructed during
closing.◀
Press the top of the switch and

hold until the initialisation is
complete:
▷ Initialisation begins within
15 seconds and is complete
when the Glass Roof and
sun blind are fully closed.
▷ The Glass Roof closes without the anti-
trap mechanism.
48
Adjusting Controls
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment Keep area of movement clear
When changing the position of the seat,
keep the area of movement of the seat clear,
otherwise persons may be injured or objects
may be damaged.◀
This also applies to safety-relevant functions Manually adjustable seats
and systems.
Overview
Safe seated position

A seated position that suitably reflects your re‐
quirements is a vital condition of relaxed driv‐
ing with a minimum of fatigue.
In the event of an accident, the seated position
plays an important role together with:
▷ Seat belts, see page 52.
▷ Head restraints, see page 54. 1 Forward/back
▷ Airbags, see page 103. 2 Thigh support
3 Seat angle
4 Backrest width
Seats
5 Lumbar support
Information 6 Height
No seat adjustment while the vehicle is in 7 Backrest angle
motion
Do not adjust the seat when driving, otherwise
the seat could move unexpectedly, making the Forward/back
driver lose control of the vehicle, leading to an
accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to‐

wards the rear
Also, do not incline the backrest of the front
passenger seat too far back when driving, oth‐
erwise there is a risk of sliding underneath the
seat belt in case of accident. The protective ef‐
fect of the seat belt is lost.◀
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
49
Controls Adjusting
After releasing the lever, move the seat gently lever, sit on and get up out of the seat to make
forward or back to make sure it engages prop‐ sure it engages properly.
erly.
Electrically adjustable seats
Height
Overview
Pull the lever and add or remove pressure on

the seat as required. 1 Seat and mirror memory
2 Backrest width
Backrest angle 3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest angle
5 Forward/back, height, seat angle
General
The driver's seat setting is saved for the profile
currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked
using the remote control, this position is called
up automatically if the function, see page 43,
for this has been activated.
Pull the lever and add or remove pressure on
the backrest as required.
Settings in detail
1. Longitudinal direction.
Seat angle
Pull the lever and move the seat until the de‐
sired angle is reached. After releasing the
50
Adjusting Controls
2. Height. Thigh support
3. Seat angle. Pull the lever on the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the backrest can be altered to
support the lordosis, the lumbar section of the
spine. The upper edge of the pelvis and the
spinal column are supported to encourage an
upright posture.
▷ Press the switch at the front/
4. Backrest angle. rear.
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the switch at the top/
bottom.
The curvature is shifted up‐
wards/downwards.
Backrest width
Alter the width of the backrest
via the side cushions to adjust
the lateral support.
51
Controls Adjusting
Seat heating, front If the journey is continued within about 15 mi‐

nutes, the seat heating automatically activates
with the last temperature set.
If ECO PRO, see page 184, is activated, the
heating power is reduced.
Switch off
Press and hold down the button.
LEDs go out.
Switching on
Press the button once per tempera‐ Seat belts
ture stage.
Maximum temperature is indicated by three Number of seat belts
LEDs. Your vehicle has been fitted with five seat belts
If the journey is continued within about 15 mi‐ for the safety of you and your passengers.
nutes, the seat heating automatically activates However, they can only offer protection when
with the last temperature set. adjusted correctly.
If ECO PRO, see page 184, is activated, the
General
heating power is reduced.
Before driving off, always make sure that all
occupants have fastened their seat belts.
Switch off
To protect vehicle occupants, belt interlock is
Press and hold down the button. triggered early. When it is applied, the belt is
LEDs go out. slowly guided from the bracket.
The airbags are a complementary safety fea‐
Seat heating, rear ture and not a substitute for the seat belts.
The belt anchorage is suitable for adults of any
stature as long as the seat is correctly adjus‐
ted.
▷ Both belt anchorages incorporated into the
rear bench seat are determined for those
sitting on the left and right.
▷ The inner seat belt buckle of the rear seat
is intended exclusively for the vehicle oc‐
cupant in the middle.
Switching on
Press the button once per tempera‐
ture stage.
Maximum temperature is indicated by three
LEDs.
52
Adjusting Controls
Information Each seat belt assembly must only be used by

one occupant; it is forbidden to put a belt
One person per seat belt
around a child being carried on the occupant's
Never restrain more than one person lap.
with each seat belt. Babies or small children
It is essential to replace the entire assembly af‐
must not travel on the lap of another occu‐
ter it has been worn in a severe impact even if
pant.◀
damage to the assembly is not obvious.◀
Fastening the seat belt
Warning
Place the seat belt tightly over the pelvis
No modifications or additions should be
and shoulder as close as possible to the body
made by the user which will either prevent the
and make sure that it is positioned low at the
seat belt adjusting devices from operating to
hip in the area of the pelvis and is not pressing
remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assem‐
on your midriff. Otherwise, the seat belt can
bly from being adjusted to remove slack.◀
slip over the hip and injure the midriff in the
event of a head-on collision.
The seat belt must not pass across the neck. It
Adjustment for automatic retracting
should not be pulled or jammed across sharp
seat belts
edges or breakable objects.◀ ▷ Draw the buckle tongue attached to the
seat belt across the body and press it into
Impairment of the restraining effect the buckle catch until a ‘click’ is heard.
Avoid bulky clothing and the belt often ▷ Adjustment of the belt length is very im‐
tensioning upwards in the upper body area. portant. To adjust the lap belt and check
Ensure that the belt does not jam, otherwise whether the buckle has locked correctly,
the belt may be damaged and the restraining pull upwards on the shoulder strap until the
effect of the seat belt may deteriorate.◀ lap belt fits tightly.
Warning ▷ The length of the diagonal shoulder strap

adjusts itself automatically to allow free‐
Seat belts are designed to bear upon the dom of movement.
bony structure of the body and should be worn
low across the front of the pelvis, or the pelvis, ▷ To release the seat belt, press the button
chest and shoulders, as applicable. Wearing on the buckle catch unit.
the lap section of the belt across the abdomi‐
nal area must be avoided. Fastening the seat belt
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as pos‐
sible, consistent with comfort, to provide the
protection for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection
afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid contamination of
the webbing by polishes, oils and chemicals
and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild soap and wa‐
ter. The belt should be replaced if webbing be‐ The seat belt buckle must be heard to engage.
comes frayed, contaminated or damaged. Seat
belts should not be worn with straps twisted.
53
Controls Adjusting
Automatically tension seat belt Checking and replacing the seat belts
If the belt is fastened, the belt strap is automat‐ Only have this work carried out at the
ically fastened once when driving off. Service Centre, as otherwise correct function‐
ing of this safety device is not ensured.◀
Unfastening the seat belt
1. Hold onto the belt.
2. Press the red button on the belt buckle. Front head restraints
3. Guide the belt back up to the reel mecha‐
nism. Correctly adjusted head restraint
Head restraints adjusted to the correct height
Seat belt reminder for driver’s and reduce the risk of injuries to the neck in the
front seat passenger seat event of an accident.
A Check Control message is displayed. Adjusting head restraint

Check whether the seat belt has been Adjust the head restraint correctly for all
fastened correctly. occupied seats, as otherwise there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in the event of an acci‐
The seat belt reminder is activated when the
dent.◀
seat belt on the driver's side is not fastened.
On some national versions, the seat belt re‐
Height
minder is also activated above approximately
10 km/h, 6 mph if the front passenger's seat Adjust the head restraint so that its centre is
belt is not fastened and if heavy objects are lo‐ approximately at the height of your ear.
cated on the seat.
Spacing
Not for Australia/New Zealand: Belt Adjust the spacing so that the head restraint is
reminder for rear seats as close as possible to the back of the head.
The indicator light in the instru‐ If necessary, adjust the spacing using the in‐
ment cluster is illuminated after cline of the seat backrest.
the engine starts.
Adjusting height
▷ Green: seat belt fastened on
the corresponding rear seat.
▷ Red: seat belt not fastened on the corre‐
sponding rear seat.
The seat belt reminder will also be activated if
a rear seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle
is in motion.
Damaged seat belts

In the event of stress due to an accident or ▷ Up: push.
damage: ▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide
Replace the belt system, including the seat- the head restraint downwards.
belt tensioner, and have the belt anchorage
checked.
54
Adjusting Controls
Incline Rear head restraints

Three different positions can be set.
Correctly adjusted head restraint
Head restraints adjusted to the correct height
reduce the risk of injuries to the neck in the
event of an accident.
Adjusting head restraint
Adjust the head restraint correctly for all
occupied seats, as otherwise there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in the event of an acci‐
dent.◀
▷ Forwards: pull upper edge of head restraint
forwards, arrow 1.
Height
▷ Back: press button, arrow 2. The head re‐
Adjust the head restraint so that its centre is
straint folds into the rearmost position.
approximately at the height of your ear.
Removing Adjusting height

Only remove the head restraint if no-one will
be sitting on the seat in question.
▷ Up: push.
▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide
1. Raise head restraint until resistance.
the head restraint downwards.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
The height of the centre head restraints can‐
head restraint fully out.
not be adjusted.
Before carrying passengers
Install the head restraints again before Fold down head restraint
carrying passengers, otherwise the head re‐
Fold in/out head restraints
straints do not offer protection.◀
Only fold in head restraints again, if oc‐
cupants are carried in the rear. Fold out folded-
in head restraints again if occupants are car‐
ried in the rear, otherwise there is an increased
risk of injury in case of accident.◀
55
Controls Adjusting
Seat and mirror memory

Information
Do not call up the memory while the ve‐
hicle is in motion
Do not call up the memory while the vehicle is
in motion, otherwise an unexpected seat
movement may cause an accident.◀
▷ Fold downwards: press button, arrow 1,
Keep area of movement clear
and press the head restraint down, arrow 2.
When changing the position of the seat,
▷ Folding upwards: pull head restraint up‐
keep the area of movement of the seat clear,
wards.
otherwise persons may be injured or objects
may be damaged.◀
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no-one will Principle
be sitting on the seat in question. Two different positions for driver's seat and
exterior mirrors can be saved and recalled per
profile. Settings for backrest width and lumbar
support are not saved.
Overview
1. Raise head restraint until resistance.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint fully out.
Before carrying passengers
Install the head restraints again before
carrying passengers, otherwise the head re‐ Saving
straints do not offer protection.◀ 1. Switch on ignition.
2. Set desired position.
3. Press the button. LED in button is

illuminated.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the
LED is lit. LED turns off.
If SET button was pressed inadvertently:
Press the button again.
56
Adjusting Controls
LED turns off. Note

Correctly estimating distance
Recalling Objects reflected in the mirrors are
closer than they appear. Do not gauge your
Convenience function distance from following traffic based on what
1. Open the driver’s door. you see in the mirror; otherwise there is an in‐
2. Switch the ignition off. creased risk of an accident.◀
3. Briefly press button 1 or 2 as desired.
Overview
The relevant seat adjustment is done automat‐
ically.
The process is cancelled if a seat adjustment
switch or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety function
1. Close the driver’s door or switch the igni‐
tion on.
2. Keep button 1 or 2 pressed as desired until
the adjustment procedure has been con‐
1 Adjusting 57
cluded.
2 Left/right, automatic parking function
Calling up has been disabled 3 Folding in and out 58
After a short time, calling up saved seat posi‐
tions is disabled to prevent the battery from Selecting a mirror
being discharged.
Switching to other mirror:
To reactivate calling up:
Push switch.
▷ Open or close a door or the tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
Electrical adjustment
▷ Press the start/stop button.
Corresponding to movement of button
Mirrors
Saving positions
Exterior mirrors Seat and mirror position memory, see page 56.
General
Adjusting manually
Depending on the equipment, the mirror set‐
In the event of an electrical defect, for example,
ting is saved for the profile currently in use.
press the borders of the mirror glass.
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control, this position is called up automatically
if the setting for this has been enabled.
57
Controls Adjusting
Automatic parking function Automatically dimming

Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐
Principle med. Photocells in the rear-view mirror, see
When reverse gear is engaged, mirror glass on page 58, are used for control.
front passenger side is titled downwards. This
improves the view of the kerb or other obsta‐ Rear-view mirror, manual-dim
cles near the ground, for example when park‐
ing. Turn button
Activating
1. Push switch to driver's mirror posi‐

tion.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
When towing a trailer, the automatic parking
function is switched off.
Deactivating To reduce glare by turning the button on the

Push switch to front passenger's mirror posi‐ rear-view mirror.
tion.
Rear-view mirror, automatic-dim
Folding in and out
Press the button. Principle
Possible up to approximately 20 km/h, 15 mph.

An advantage, for example
▷ In car washes.
▷ In narrow streets.
▷ When folding mirrors back out that have
been folded in manually.
Folded-in mirrors automatically fold out at ap‐
proximately 40 km/h, 25 mph. The function is controlled by photocells:
Folding mirrors in a car wash ▷ In the mirror glass
Before driving through a car wash, fold ▷ On the back of the mirror
the mirrors in manually or by pressing button;
otherwise, they could be damaged due to the
width of the car.◀
To keep the system functioning properly:
Automatic heating ▷ Keep photocells clean.

Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated ▷ Do not obstruct the zone between the rear-
with the engine running. view mirror and windscreen.
58
Adjusting Controls
Steering wheel Steering wheel heating
Note
Do not adjust the steering wheel whilst
the vehicle is in motion
Do not adjust the steering wheel position while
the vehicle is in motion, or an accident may re‐
sult from any unexpected movement.◀
Electric steering wheel lock

Press the button.
With manual gearbox: The steering wheel
locks automatically when the driver's door is
opened. ▷ On: LED is illuminated.
Switch on ignition to unlock. ▷ Off: LED turns off.
Switch on ignition
Before moving the vehicle, switch on the
ignition, otherwise the electric steering wheel
lock is not locked and the vehicle cannot be
steered.◀
Adjusting
1. Fold the lever downwards.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated posi‐
tion.
3. Swing the lever back up.
59
Controls Carrying children in safety
Carrying children in safety

Important considerations
Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, as they could otherwise endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening
the doors, for example.◀
Not for Australia/New Zealand: Suitable seats

Information about which child seats can be are attached with a seat belt — according to
used on the seats in question, if the child seats ECE-R 16 standard:
Group Weight of child Approximate Front pas‐ Rear seats, Rear seat,
age senger's seat outer middle
0 Up to 10 kg Up U U X
to 9 months
0+ Up to 13 kg Up U U X
to 18 months
I 9 – 18 kg Up to 4 years U U X
II 15 – 25 kg Up to 7 years U U X
III 22 – 36 kg 7 years or U U X
more
U: suitable for child restraint systems in Universal category that have been approved for use in
this weight group.
X: not suitable for child restraint systems in Universal category that have been approved for use
in this weight group.
Always carry children at the rear Carry children at the rear

Accident research has shown that the safest Children younger than 12 years or
place for children is on the rear seat. smaller than 150 cm, 5 ft are only to travel in
the rear in suitable child restraints, otherwise
60
Carrying children in safety Controls
there is an increased risk of injury in the event Ensure stability of child seat
of an accident.◀ When installing child restraint systems,
make sure that the child seat makes firm con‐
Not for Australia/New Zealand: tact with the seat backrest. To do this, adapt
Children on the front passenger's seat the backrest angle on all the seats in question
If it becomes necessary to use a child restraint as far as possible and also adjust the height of
in the front passenger's seat, make sure that the head restraints or, if possible, remove
the front and side airbags on the passenger's them. Make sure that all backrests are securely
side are disabled. Front passenger airbags can locked. Otherwise, the stability of the child
only be deactivated with the key switch for seat is limited and there is an increased risk of
front passenger airbags, see page 105. injury due to unexpected movement of the
backrest.◀
Note
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
For Australia/New Zealand:
installation of child restraints
If you fit a child restraint in the front pas‐
Please note the following warning because
senger's seat, deactivate the front passenger
your vehicle has been equipped with a front
airbags, otherwise a child travelling on that
airbag for the front passenger's seat that can‐
seat will face an increased risk of injury if the
not be deactivated:
airbags are deployed, even if a child restraint is
used.◀ It is recommended not to use any kind
of child restraint system on the front
passenger's seat.
Fitting child restraints Extreme hazard
Child restraints Do not use a rearward facing child re‐
straint on a seat protected by an airbag in front
Child restraints for every age and weight class
of it.◀
are available from the Service centre
Information Not for Australia/New Zealand: On the

front passenger's seat
Manufacturer specifications for child re‐
straints Deactivating airbags
When selecting, installing and using child re‐
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
straints, follow the manufacturer's information,
otherwise the protection may be affected.◀ If you fit a child restraint in the front pas‐
senger's seat, deactivate the front passenger
Child restraints following an accident airbags, otherwise a child travelling on that
Following an accident, all components of seat will face an increased risk of injury if the
the child restraint and the seat belt that was airbags are deployed, even if a child restraint is
used to secure it should be checked and re‐ used.◀
newed if necessary. Before fitting a child restraint in the front pas‐
This work should only be carried out by your senger's seat, make sure that the front and
Service centre.◀ side airbags on the passenger's side are disa‐
bled.
61
Deactivating the front passenger airbags with to the rear and as far up as possible to achieve
key switch, see page 105. the best possible routing of the belt and pro‐
tection in the event of an accident.
Rear-facing child restraints If the upper attachment point of the seat belt is
Deactivate front passenger airbags if us‐ located ahead of the child seat's belt guide,
ing rear-facing child restraints carefully move the front passenger's seat for‐
wards until the best possible belt guidance is
If you fit a rear-facing child restraint in the front
achieve.
passenger's seat, deactivate the front passen‐
ger airbags, otherwise a child travelling on that
seat will face an increased risk of injury if the
Backrest width
airbags are deployed, even if a child restraint is Backrest width for child’s seat
used.◀ Before fitting a child restraint system in
the front passenger’s seat, the backrest width
must be fully open. Do not change the setting
while the child restraint system is fitted, as oth‐
erwise the stability of the child’s seat will be re‐
stricted.◀
With adjustable backrest width: before fitting a

child restraint system in the front passenger’s
seat, fully open the backrest width. Do not
change the backrest width from this point on
Follow the instructions on the front passenger and do not call up a memory position.
sun visor.
Seat position and height

Before mounting a universal child restraint
system, move the front passenger's seat as far
ISOFIX child seat mountings

Note Comply with manufacturer specifications
Note for Australia: ISOFIX child seats are not for ISOFIX child restraints
allowable for road use in Australia at the time For fitting and using ISOFIX child restraints,
of printing of this handbook. However, also observe the operating and safety instructions
since a change of the respective regulations is of the system's manufacturer, as the protec‐
expected for the future, lower ISOFIX ancho‐ tive effect could otherwise be impaired.◀
rages are supplied in line with applicable ADRs
also for Australia.
62
Suitable ISOFIX child restraints
Group Weight of child Approximate age Class/category – a) Front Rear seats,

pas‐ outer
seng‐
er's
seat
Carrycot F - ISO/L1 X IL
G - ISO/L2 X IL
0 Up to 10 kg Approximately 9 E - ISO/R1 X IL
months
0+ Up to 13 kg Approximately 18 E - ISO/R1 X IL
months D - ISO/R2 X IL
C - ISO/R3 X IL
I 9 - 18 kg Up to approxi‐ D - ISO/R2 X IL
mately 4 years C - ISO/R3 X IL
B - ISO/F2 X IL, IUF
B1 - ISO/F2X X IL, IUF
A - ISO/F3 X IL, IUF
IL: the seat is suitable for installation of an ISOFIX child seat in the Semi-Universal category sub‐
ject to compliance with the list of vehicles accompanying the child seat.
IUF: the seat is suitable for installation of an ISOFIX child seat with Universal approval and at‐
tachment with the TOP TETHER strap.
X: the seat is not equipped with anchor points for the ISOFIX system.
a) When using child seats on the rear seats, adapt the front/back position of the front seat if nec‐
essary, and also adjust the head restraint of the rear seat, or remove it.
Brackets for lower ISOFIX anchors The corresponding symbol shows the
brackets for lower ISOFIX anchor
Properly engage the lower ISOFIX an‐
points.
chors
Make sure that the lower ISOFIX anchors are
correctly locked in place and that the child re‐
straint is seated firmly against the backrest, as
otherwise the protective effect can be dimin‐
ished.◀
Before fitting ISOFIX child restraints, pull the

belt away from the area of the child seat
mountings.
63
Position Note
Securing eyelets
Only use the fastening eyes of the upper
holding belt for fastening child restraints, oth‐
erwise the fastening points may be damaged.◀
Guide of the retaining strap

Retaining strap
Make sure that the upper retaining strap
The brackets for the lower ISOFIX anchors are is guided to the upper mounting point without
located behind the marked covers. touching the head restraint or sharp edges and
it is not twisted, otherwise the seat belt cannot
secure the child restraint appropriately in the
Mounting ISOFIX child restraints event of an accident.◀
without electrical rear seats
1. Fit the child restraint, see instructions of
the system.
2. Make sure that both ISOFIX anchors have
snapped into place.
Upper ISOFIX retaining strap
Mounting points
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for the upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point/eyelet
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
There are two mounting points for the upper Attaching the upper retaining strap to
retaining strap of ISOFIX child restraints. the mounting point
1. Raise head restraint if necessary.
The mounting point for the upper re‐
taining strap is identified with a Top 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
Tether symbol. the head restraint mounts.
3. Guide the holding belt between the back‐
rest and luggage cover.
4. Engage the hook of the retaining strap in
the securing eyelet.
64
5. Pull the restraining strap firmly down. The mounting point for the upper re‐
6. Push head restraint down if necessary and taining strap is identified with a Top
engage. Tether symbol.
Guide of the retaining strap

For Australia/New Zealand: Retaining strap
Child restraints Make sure that the upper retaining strap
is guided to the upper mounting point without
Information
touching the head restraint or sharp edges and
In accordance with ADR 34/01, provisions it is not twisted, otherwise the seat belt cannot
have been made to allow installation of a child secure the child restraint appropriately in the
restraint at each rear seating position. event of an accident.◀
The anchoring hooks which belong to the up‐
per restraining strap of the child restraint - AS
1754, can be applied immediately to the rele‐
vant mounting.
Please refer strictly to the installation instruc‐
tions supplied with the child restraint system.
Each seating position is fitted with a head rest.
Warning
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by cor‐ 1 Direction of travel
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum‐ 2 Head restraint
stances are they to be used for adult seat 3 Hook for the upper retaining strap
belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle. After using and re‐ 4 Mounting point/eyelet
moving child restraints, fold away the anchor 5 Seat backrest
brackets if necessary.◀ 6 Upper retaining strap
Mounting points Attaching the upper retaining strap to

the mounting point
1. Raise head restraint if necessary.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint mounts.
3. Guide the holding belt between the back‐
rest and luggage cover.
4. Engage the hook of the retaining strap in
the securing eyelet.
There are three mounting points on the rear 5. Pull the restraining strap firmly down.
seat backrest for child restraint systems with a 6. Push head restraint down if necessary and
upper retaining strap. engage.
65
Securing doors and windows

Rear doors
Push down the locking levers on the rear

doors.
The door in question can now only be opened

from the outside.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's door if
children are travelling in the rear.
Various functions are blocked and cannot be

operated in the rear, safety switch, see
page 46.
66
Driving Controls
Driving
Vehicle equipment cally activated when door is opened if light is
switched off or daytime driving lights are
This chapter describes all standard, national switched on, when corresponding equipment
and special equipment provided in the model is fitted.
therefore also described, for example the se‐ Ignition off
Steptronic transmission: Press the start/stop
button again without applying the brakes.
and systems.
Manual gearbox: Press the start/stop button
again, do not press the clutch pedal.
Start/stop button All indicator lights in the instrument cluster ex‐
tinguish.
Principle To save battery power when the engine is off,
The ignition is switched on or off switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
and the engine is started by electronic systems.
pressing the start/stop button. P with the ignition switched off
Steptronic transmission: The P is engaged automatically with the igni‐
engine starts if the brakes are tion switched off. Make sure that in a car wash,
applied when the start-stop button is pressed. for example, the ignition is not switched off in‐
Manual gearbox: The engine starts if the clutch advertently.◀
pedal is pressed when pressing the start/stop
Ignition automatically switches off with a sta‐
button.
tionary vehicle and engine shut off:
▷ When locking, even with the low-beam
Ignition on headlights switched on.
Steptronic transmission: Press the start/stop ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged so
button without applying the brakes. that an engine start remains possible. This
Manual gearbox: Press the start/stop button, function is only available with the low-
do not press the clutch pedal. beam headlights switched off.
All systems are ready to operate. ▷ When opening or closing the driver's door,
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the if the driver's belt is unfastened and the
instrument cluster are illuminated for different low-beam headlights are switched off.
lengths of time. ▷ When the driver's belt is unfastened, if the
To save battery power when the engine is off, driver's door is opened and the low-beam
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary headlights switched off.
electronic systems. After about 15 minutes without further opera‐
tion, low-beam headlights are changed over to
Note side lights.
If engine is switched off and ignition is
switched on, radio ready state will be automati‐
67
Controls Driving
Radio ready state Starting more than once in quick succes‐

Activate radio ready state: sion
▷ When the engine is running: press the Avoid starting, stopping and restarting the en‐
start/stop button. gine in rapid succession as well as repeated at‐
tempts to start the engine if it does not fire.
Individual electrical systems remain ready to
Otherwise unburned or only partially combus‐
operate.
ted fuel could reach the catalytic converter,
Radio ready state switches off automatically: which could overheat and sustain damage as a
▷ After approximately eight minutes. result.◀
▷ When locking via the central locking sys‐ Do not warm up the engine with the car at a
tem. standstill; it is preferable to set off straight
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged so away, driving at moderate engine speeds.
that an engine start remains possible.
Radio readiness remains active when ignition Diesel engine
is switched off automatically, such as for With the engine cold and at temperatures be‐
following reasons: low approximately 0 ℃, 32 ℉, the starting op‐
▷ Opening or closing driver's door. eration can be delayed slightly due to auto‐
matic preheating.
▷ Unfastening driver's seat belt.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ When low-beam headlights are automati‐
cally changed to side lights.
Steptronic transmission
Starting the engine

Engine start 1. Press the brake.
Information 2. Press the start/stop button.
Starting proceeds for a certain time automati‐
Enclosed spaces
cally and stops as soon as the engine is star‐
Never run the engine in enclosed spaces, ted.
as inhaling the exhaust gas can lead to loss of
consciousness with fatal consequences. The Manual gearbox
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, which
is colourless and odourless, but highly toxic.◀ Starting the engine
Unattended vehicle 1. Press the brake.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with 2. Depress the clutch and engage idle posi‐
the engine running, as this constitutes a haz‐ tion.
ard. 3. Press the start/stop button.
Before leaving the vehicle when the engine is Starting proceeds for a certain time automati‐
running, apply the parking brake and engage cally and stops as soon as the engine is star‐
selector lever in P or idle position, otherwise ted.
the vehicle may move.◀
68
Driving Controls
Stopping the engine Auto Start Stop function

Notes Principle
Removing the remote control The Auto Start Stop function helps you to save
fuel, by stopping the engine when stationary,
To avoid the risk of children starting the
for example, in a traffic jam or at traffic lights.
engine, always take the remote control with
The ignition remains switched on. For driving
you when you leave the car.◀
off, the engine starts automatically.
Apply the parking brake and further se‐
cure the vehicle as required Automatic operation
When parking, apply the parking brake firmly to After each time the engine is started using the
prevent the car from rolling. On steep upward start/stop button, the Auto Start Stop function
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ is ready to operate.
hicle, for example, by turning the steering The function is activated from 5 km/h,
wheel in the direction of the curb. ◀ 3 mph3 mph, km/h.
Before entering the car wash Stopping the engine

So that the vehicle can roll into the vehicle The engine is automatically shut down when
wash, follow the information on washing in au‐ stationary under the following conditions:
tomatic vehicle washes, see page 234. Steptronic transmission:
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position D.
▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is at a standstill.
Stopping the engine
1. With vehicle at a standstill, engage selector ▷ Driver's seat belt buckled or driver's door
lever position P. closed.
2. Press the start/stop button. Manual gearbox:
The engine is switched off. ▷ Transmission in neutral and clutch pedal

not pressed.
The radio ready state is switched on.
▷ Driver's seat belt buckled or driver's door
3. Apply the parking brake. closed.
The air flow rate of the air conditioning system
Manual gearbox
is reduced when the engine is not running.
Stopping the engine
Displays in the instrument cluster
1. Press the Start/Stop button when the vehi‐
cle is at standstill. The display READY in the revo‐
lution counter indicates that the
2. Engage first gear or reverse.
Auto Start Stop function is
3. Apply the parking brake. ready for automatic engine
starting.
69
Controls Driving
The display indicates that the ▷ Driver's seat belt unbuckled and driver's
preconditions for an automatic door open.
engine stop are not met. ▷ Bonnet has been unlocked.
Several indicator lights illuminate for various
lengths of time.
Note The engine can only be started using the start/
stop button.
The engine is not shut down automatically in
the following situations:
Note
▷ Outside temperature too low.
Even if you do not want to drive off, the engine
▷ High outside temperature and operation of restarts automatically in the following situa‐
the automatic air conditioning. tions:
▷ Interior not heated or cooled to the desired ▷ Very high temperature inside the passen‐
temperature. ger compartment, if the cooling function is
▷ Engine is not yet at operating temperature. on.
▷ Sharp steering angle or steering operation. ▷ The driver applies lock to the steering
▷ After reversing. wheel.
▷ Condensation when the automatic air con‐ ▷ Steptronic transmission: shift from selector
ditioning is switched on. lever position D to N, R or M/S.
▷ Vehicle battery is very low. ▷ Steptronic transmission: shift from selector
lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.
▷ At high altitudes.
▷ Vehicle starts to roll.
▷ Bonnet is unlocked.
▷ Condensation when the automatic air con‐
▷ Parking assistant is activated.
ditioning is switched on.
▷ Stop-start traffic.
▷ Vehicle battery is very low.
▷ Selector lever in position N, M/S or R.
▷ Very low temperature inside the passenger
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. compartment, if the heating is on.
▷ Low brake vacuum, for example because
Engine start
the brake pedal has been depressed a
For driving off, the engine automatically starts number of times in succession.
under the following conditions:
▷ Steptronic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ Manual gearbox:
Clutch pedal is depressed.
After starting the engine, accelerate as normal.
Safety function
After an automatic shut down, the engine will
not restart automatically if one of the following
conditions is satisfied:
70
Driving Controls
Manually deactivating/activating the Malfunction

system The Auto Start Stop function no longer shuts
down the engine. A Check Control message is
Using the button displayed. It is possible to keep driving. Have
the system checked.
Parking brake
Applying
The lever engages itself after pulling up.
The indicator light illuminates red. The
parking brake is engaged.
Press the button.
Releasing
▷ LED illuminates: Auto Start Stop function
is deactivated.
During an automatic engine stop, the en‐
gine is started.
The engine can be started or stopped only
by means of the start/stop button.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is
activated.
Parking the vehicle during automatic

Pull up the lever a bit, press the button and
engine stop
guide the lever down.
With automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be
parked safely, for example in order to leave it. Information
1. Press the start/stop button. The ignition is Use while the vehicle is in motion
switched off. The Auto Start Stop function
If, exceptionally, use while the vehicle is
is deactivated.
in motion is necessary, do not pull on the park‐
Selector lever position P is automatically ing brake too powerfully. Keep pressing the
engaged. button on the lever.
2. Apply the parking brake. Otherwise too powerful pulling on the parking
Start engine as usual, using the start/stop but‐ brake can cause the rear wheels to lock and
ton. the associated swerving of the vehicle rear.◀
To avoid corrosion and one-sided braking ef‐

Automatic deactivation fect, slightly pull on the parking brake from
In certain situations the Auto Start Stop func‐ time to time when moving away, if traffic condi‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety's tions allow.
sake, for example if the absence of the driver is
The brake lights do not illuminate when the
detected.
parking brake is applied.
71
Controls Driving
Turn indicators, high-beam The setting is stored for the currently used
profile.
headlights, headlight flasher
Indicating a turn briefly
Turn indicator
Press the lever as far as the resistance point
Information and hold it there for as long as you wish to indi‐
cate a turn.
Do not fold in exterior mirror
When driving and when operating the High-beam headlights, headlight
turn indicator/hazard warning indicator do not flasher
fold in exterior mirror, as otherwise the addi‐
tional indicators in the exterior mirror do not
have the prescribed position and it is difficult
to detect them.◀
Indicating
▷ High-beam headlights, arrow 1.

▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Wiper system
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
Switching the wipers on/off and flick-
To cancel the signal manually, press the lever
wiping
as far as the resistance point.
If the indicator light flashes more rapidly than Information

usual, a turn indicator bulb has failed. No wiper operation in the event of frost
During trailer towing, the light might also indi‐ Do not switch on the wipers when they
cate failure of one of the turn signal lights of are frozen, otherwise the wiper blades and
the trailer. wiper motor can be damaged.◀
Triple turn signal Wiper operation not with a dry wind‐

screen
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
Do not use wipers with a dry windscreen, oth‐
The turn indicator flashes three times.
erwise the wiper blades will wear or become
This function can be enabled or disabled. damaged more quickly.◀
1. "Settings"
2. "Lights"
3. "1-touch triple turn signal"
72
Driving Controls
Wiper operation not with wipers folded ▷ Switching off normal mode: press down‐
out wards once.
Do not switch on wipers if they are folded out, ▷ Switching off fast mode: press downwards
otherwise the bonnet or wipers may be dam‐ twice.
aged.◀
Intermittent operation or rain sensor
Switching on
Principle
Without rain sensor, the interval for the wiper
operation is specified.
The rain sensor automatically controls the
wiper operation depending on the rain inten‐
sity. The sensor is mounted on the wind‐
screen, directly in front of the interior mirror.
Activating/deactivating
Press the wiper lever upwards.
The lever returns to the basic position when
released.
▷ Normal wiping speed: press upwards once.
When the vehicle is stationary, the wipers
switch to intermittent operation.
▷ Rapid wiping speed: press upwards twice
or press once beyond the resistance point.
When the vehicle is stationary, the wipers Press the button on the wiper lever.
switch to normal speed. Wiping is started. If a rain sensor is fitted: LED
in wiper lever illuminates.
Switching off and flick-wiping If there is frost, no wiping process is started.
Disable the rain sensor in car washes

Deactivate the rain sensor in an auto‐
matic car wash to prevent the wipers from be‐
ing activated inadvertently and damaged.◀
Press the wiper lever downwards.

The lever returns to the basic position when
released.
▷ Flick-wiping: press downwards once.
73
Controls Driving
Setting interval time or sensitivity of Windscreen washer jets

the rain sensor Windscreen washer jets are automatically
heated when the ignition is switched on.
Switching on rear window wiper
Turn the knurled wheel.
Cleaning the window glass, headlights

Push the wiper lever forwards to activate inter‐
mittent operation. Engaging reverse gear acti‐
vates continuous operation.
To clean the rear window push the wiper lever
further forward.
Fold-out position of the wipers

This is important, for example for replacing the
wiper blades or folding them out in the event of
frost.
Pull the wiper lever.
Fluid from the washer fluid reservoir is sprayed 1. Switches ignition on and back off again.
onto the windscreen and the wipers are oper‐ 2. If there is a risk of frost, make sure that the
ated briefly. wiper blades are not frozen.
When the vehicle's lights are switched on, the 3. Press the wiper lever upwards beyond the
headlights are also cleaned simultaneously at resistance point and hold it there for ap‐
practical intervals. proximately three seconds until the wipers
come to a standstill in a nearly vertical po‐
Do not use the washer system in the sition.
event of frost
After folding the wipers in, the wiper system
Only operate the washer systems and cleaning must be reactivated.
equipment if you are certain that the fluid will
not freeze on the windscreen and interfere with Folding the wipers onto the windscreen
the view ahead. Therefore, use anti-freeze. Before switching on the ignition, fold the
Do not use the washer systems if the fluid res‐ wipers onto the windscreen, otherwise dam‐
ervoir is empty, or the washer pump will be age can occur when the wipers are switched
damaged.◀ on.◀
1. Switch on ignition.
74
Driving Controls
2. Press the wiper lever downwards. The wip‐ Do not top up with undiluted screenwash con‐
ers move to the rest position and are op‐ centrate and antifreeze and do not top up with
erational once again. pure water; that may damage the washer sys‐
tem.
Do not mix any screenwash concentrates of
Washer fluid different manufacturers, as this may otherwise
block the washer nozzles.
General Recommended minimum fill level: 1 litre, ap‐
Anti-freeze protection for washer fluid proximately 1.7 Imp. pints.
Anti-freeze is flammable and may cause
injuries if not used properly.
It should therefore be kept away from naked
Manual gearbox
flames.
Shifting gears
Only store it in the sealed original container
and out of reach of children. Change to 5th or 6th gear
Comply with the information on the con‐ During gearchange to 5th or 6th gear,
tainer.◀ push gear shift lever to right, otherwise an in‐
advertent change to 3rd or 4th gear could lead
to engine damage.◀
Reservoir for washer fluid
Topping up washer fluid Reverse gear
Only top up washer fluid when the en‐ Engage this position only when the vehicle is
gine has cooled down and then fully close the stationary.
lid to prevent washer fluid from making contact
To overcome the resistance of the selector
with hot engine components.
lever move in a dynamic movement towards
Otherwise, if the fluid is spilled, there is a risk the left and engage the reverse gear.
of fire and personal safety is endangered.◀
Selector lever positions
D Drive
Selector lever position for all normal driving. All
gears for forward driving are selected automat‐
ically.
All washer jets are supplied from one tank.
R Reverse
When filling with a mixture of screenwash con‐
Engage this position only when the vehicle is
centrate and tap water, to which anti-freeze
stationary.
has been added if required, always follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
Before topping up, mix the washer fluid to
comply with the mixture ratio.
75
Controls Driving
N Neutral erwise the desired gearshift will not be per‐

The vehicle will be able to roll. Select this in a formed: shiftlock.
car wash, for example.
Engaging D, R, N
With the ignition off, see page 67, selector
lever position P is engaged automatically.
P Park
Engage this position only when the vehicle is
stationary. The driven wheels are locked.
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ After stopping the engine in the radio
ready state, see page 68, or ignition off,
Briefly press the selector lever in the desired
see page 67, when position R or D is en‐
direction, possibly overcoming a resistance
gaged.
point.
▷ With ignition off, when selector lever posi‐
When you let go of the selector lever, it returns
tion N is engaged.
to the central position.
▷ If the vehicle is at a standstill and position
D or R is engaged, the driver's side seat
belt is unfastened, the driver's door is
opened and the brake is not depressed.
Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the se‐
lector lever is engaged in the P position. The
vehicle could otherwise start to move.
Kick-down
Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum
performance. Press the accelerator pedal Press the unlock button to:
down beyond the regular full-throttle position; ▷ Engage R.
resistance will be felt.
▷ Shift from P.
Engaging selector lever positions

Engaging P
Apply the brake until you are ready to
move off
Apply the brake until you are ready to move off;
this will prevent the vehicle from moving when
a gear is selected.◀
▷ It is only possible to move from selector

lever position P with the engine running
and the brake pressed.
▷ Before shifting from P or N when the vehi‐
cle is stationary, first press the brake, oth‐ Press button P.
76
Driving Controls
Sport program and manual operation Steptronic Sport transmission: avoid

automatic upshifting in manual
Activating the sport program operation M/S
With the Steptronic Sport transmission, auto‐
matic shift processes, for example with maxi‐
mum engine speed, are not carried out if one
of the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC deactivated
▷ TRACTION activated
▷ SPORT+ activated
The Kick-down is also deactivated.
Press the selector lever out of selector lever
position D to the left.
Switching off the sport program/
manual shift mode
The sport program of the gearbox is activated.
Press the selector lever to the right.
D is shown in the instrument cluster.
Activating M/S manual-shift mode
1. Press the selector lever out of selector Shift paddles
lever position D to the left.
2. Pull the selector lever forwards or back‐
wards.
Manual operation becomes active and the gear
is shifted.
The gear selected appears briefly on the in‐
strument cluster, for example M1.
To reach maximum engine speed, or if engine
temperature is too high, it automatically up‐
shifts as needed in manual shift mode M/S. Shift paddles on steering wheel enable fast
gearshifting without taking hands off steering
Switching to manual shift mode wheel.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ▷ Change up: pull right shift paddle briefly.
wards. ▷ Change down: pull left shift paddle briefly.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector level back‐ ▷ Change down to lowest possible gear: give
wards. left shift paddle a long pull.
Gear changes are only done with the suitable Gear changes are only done with the suitable
engine and travel speed, for example, there is engine and travel speed, for example, there is
no change down with too high an engine no change down with too high an engine
speed. speed.
The gear selected appears briefly on the in‐ The gear selected appears briefly on the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the gear actually strument cluster, followed by the gear cur‐
in use. rently in use.
77
Controls Driving
If you switch gear with the shift paddles whilst Position N is shown in the instrument clus‐
in automatic mode, the vehicle switches to ter.
manual shift mode briefly. 5. Release the brake as soon as the starter
If selector lever remains in selector lever posi‐ stops.
tion D, change to automatic operation is possi‐ 6. Manoeuvre the vehicle out of the danger
ble: area and then secure it against rolling
▷ Give right shift paddle a long pull. away.
Or
Steptronic Sport transmission:
▷ In addition to briefly pulling right shift pad‐
Launch Control
dle, briefly pull left shift paddle.
System reverts to automatic operation from Principle
manual operation after a certain period of time
Launch Control allows optimised acceleration
without acceleration or gearshifts using shift
when driving off on a non-slip road surface.
paddles.
Information
Displays in the instrument cluster Component wear
The selector lever position is dis‐ Do not use Launch Control too often,
played, for example: P. otherwise there is a risk of premature compo‐
nent wear due to the high loading of the vehi‐
cle.◀
Do not use Launch Control when running in,

Unlocking transmission lockout
see page 174.
electronically
To support the driving stability, re-activate
General DSC as soon as possible.
Unlocking transmission lockout electronically An experienced driver may be able to achieve
to manoeuvre the vehicle out of the danger better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
area.
Unlocking is possible if the starter can turn the
Requirements
engine. Launch Control is available with an engine at
operating temperature, so after an uninterrup‐
Engaging selector lever position N ted drive of at least 10 km, approximately
6 miles.
1. Press the brake.
To start with Launch Control, do not engage
2. Press the start/stop button. The starter
the steering wheel.
must be heard to start turning.
3. Press the selector lever to position N and Starting with Launch Control
hold it there.
With the engine running:
A corresponding check control message is
displayed.
1. Press button or select Sport+ with
4. Press the selector lever to position N again drive experience switch.
within approximately 6 seconds.
78
Driving Controls
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument

cluster and the DSC OFF indicator light is
illuminated.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. Depress the brake forcefully with your foot.
4. Press the accelerator pedal down beyond
the regular full-throttle position and hold.
A flag symbol is shown in the instrument
cluster.
5. The engine speed when driving off is regu‐
lated. Release the brake within 3 seconds.
Before using Launch Control again, allow the
transmission to cool down for about 5 minutes.
When used again, Launch Control sets itself to
the ambient conditions, for example wet carria‐
geway.
79
Controls Displays
Displays
Overview, Instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 85 5 Engine oil temperature 85

2 Speedometer 6 Electronic displays 80
3 Messages, for example, check control 7 Reset kilometres 85
4 Revolution counter 85
Electronic displays
▷ Selection lists, see page 90. ▷ Date, see page 86.
▷ Outside temperature., see page 85 ▷ Energy recuperation, see page 86.
▷ Auto Start Stop function, see page 69. ▷ Gear Indicator, see page 78.
▷ On-board computer, see page 91. ▷ Seat belt reminder for rear seats, see
page 54.
80
Displays Controls
▷ Kilometres/trip odometer, see page 85. Red lights

▷ Messages, for example check control, see
page 81. Seat belt reminder
▷ Current fuel consumption, see page 86. Seat belt is not fastened on the driver's
▷ Navigation display, see Owner's Handbook side. With some country versions, the
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ belt reminder is also active if the front
cation. passenger's belt is not fastened or heavy ob‐
jects are on the front passenger seat.
▷ Range, see page 86.
Check whether the seat belt has been fas‐
▷ Status, drive experience switch, see tened correctly.
page 128.
▷ Service requirements, see page 87.
Not for Australia/New Zealand: Belt
▷ Speed Limit Information, see page 89. reminder for rear seats
▷ Time, see page 86.
Red: seat belt not fastened on the cor‐
responding rear seat.
Green: seat belt fastened on the corre‐
Check control sponding rear seat.
Principle
The check control monitors vehicle functions Airbag system
and alerts you to any faults in the monitored Airbag system and belt tensioner may
systems. be faulty.
A check control message is displayed as a Have the vehicle checked as soon as
combination of indicator or warning lights and possible by the Service Centre.
text messages in the instrument cluster and
the Head-Up Display.
Parking brake, brake system
If applicable, the text message shown in the
Control Display is accompanied by an addi‐ For further information see release
tional acoustic sound. parking brake, see page 71.
Indicator and warning lights Front-end collision warning
General Illuminating: forewarning, for example if

a danger of collision is anticipated or
Indicator and warning lights in the instrument
there is a very short distance to a vehi‐
cluster can illuminate in a variety of combina‐
cle ahead.
tions and colours.
Increase distance.
When the engine starts or the ignition is
switched on, the functionality of some lights is Flashing: acute warning in the event of an im‐
briefly checked. mediate collision if the vehicle approaches an‐
other vehicle with relatively high differential
speed.
Engage by braking and swerving as required.
81
Controls Displays
Person warning Illuminating: DSC has failed. Have system

checked by the Service Centre.
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
For further information see Dynamic Stability
Control, DSC, see page 126.
If there is a risk of collision with a detected per‐
son, the symbol lights up and a signal sounds.
Dynamic Stability Control, DSC
deactivated, or Dynamic Traction Control,
Orange lights DTC activated
Active Cruise Control Dynamic Stability Control, DSC, is

switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐
The number of transverse bars shows
trol, DTC is switched on.
the selected distance to the vehicle in
front. For further information see Dynamic Stability
Control, see page 126, and Dynamic Traction
For further information see Active Cruise Con‐
Control, see page 127.
trol with Stop & Go function, ACC, see
page 132.
Runflat indicator RPA
Vehicle recognition, Active Cruise Control The runflat indicator reports a pressure
loss in a tyre.
Illuminating: preceding vehicle detec‐
ted. Reduce your speed and carefully stop
the vehicle. Avoid violent or sudden braking
Flashing: the requirements for opera‐
and steering manoeuvres.
tion of the system are no longer being met.
For more information, see Runflat indicator,
The system was deactivated but will continue
see page 109.
to brake until you actively take over by de‐
pressing the brake or the accelerator pedal.
Tyre Pressure Monitor TPM
Yellow lights Illuminating: the runflat indicator re‐

ports a pressure loss in a tyre.
Anti-lock Brake System, ABS Reduce your speed and carefully stop
With full braking, the braking distance the vehicle. Avoid violent or sudden braking
is kept as short as possible. and steering manoeuvres.
Illuminating: avoid sharp braking as Flashing and then illuminating continuously: no

much as possible. Braking force reinforcement flat tyres or loss of tyre pressure can be detec‐
faulty. Stop carefully. Consider longer braking ted.
distance. Have checked by the Service Centre ▷ Fault due to systems or devices with the
as appropriate. same frequency: the system is automati‐
cally reactivated upon leaving the field of
interference.
Dynamic Stability Control, DSC
▷ TPM could not shut down the reset: exe‐
Flashing: DSC is regulating the accel‐ cute a reset of the system again.
eration and braking forces. The vehicle
is stabilised. Decrease speed and ad‐
just driving profile to the road conditions.
82
Displays Controls
▷ Wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: Green lights

have the vehicle checked by the Service
Centre if necessary. Turn indicator
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by Turn indicator on.
the Service Centre.
If the indicator light flashes more rap‐
For more information, see Tyre Pressure Moni‐ idly than usual, a turn indicator bulb has
tor, see page 106. failed.
For further information see turn indicator, see
Steering system page 72.
Steering system faulty.
Have steering system checked by the Side lights, low-beam headlights
Service Centre. Side lights or low-beam headlights are
switched on.
Engine functions For further information see side lights/
low-beam headlights, low-beam headlight
Have vehicle checked by the Service
control, see page 97.
Centre.
For further information see socket for
on-board diagnosis, see page 214. Front fog lights
Front fog lights are switched on.
Lane departure warning For further information see front fog
lights, see page 100.
System is switched on and warns you
under certain conditions if you leave a
detected lane without indicating first. High-beam assistance
For further information see Lane Departure High-beam assistance is switched on.
Warning, see page 119.
High-beam is switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the traffic situa‐
Speed limit, adjustable tion.
Illuminating: the system is switched on. For further information see high beam assis‐
tance, see page 99.
Flashing: set speed limit exceeded. An
acoustic signal may sound.
Reduce speed or deactivate system. Cruise Control
The system is switched on. The speed
Rear fog light set using the control functions on the
steering wheel is maintained.
Rear fog lights are switched on.
For further information see rear fog
lights, see page 100.
83
Controls Displays
Blue lights Hiding check control messages
High-beam headlights
High-beam headlights are switched on.
For further information see high-beam
headlights, see page 72.
General lights
Check control
Press the on-board computer button on the
At least one check control message is turn indicator lever.
displayed or stored (symbol in display).
▷ Some check control messages are dis‐
played permanently and remain until the
Text messages fault has been repaired. If there are a num‐
Text messages and symbols in the instrument ber of malfunctions simultaneously, the
cluster explain the meaning of a check control messages are displayed in succession.
message and the indicator and warning lights. These messages can be hidden for ap‐
proximately eight seconds. They are then
Supplementary text messages displayed again automatically.
You can call up additional information, for ex‐ ▷ Other check control messages are auto‐
ample the cause of the fault and any action re‐ matically hidden after approximately
quired, via check control. 20 seconds. They remain saved and can
The supplementary text is automatically shown be displayed again.
in the Control Display for urgent messages.
Displaying check control messages
Symbols saved in memory
Depending on the Check Control message, the On the Control Display:
following functions can be selected.
1. "Vehicle information"
▷ "Owner's Handbook"
2. "Vehicle status"
Display additional information on the
Check Control message in the integrated 3. "Check Control"
Owner's Handbook. 4. Select a text message.
▷ "Service request"
Messages displayed at the end of
Contact a Service centre. a journey
▷ "Mobile Care" Special messages displayed when driving are
Contact the Mobile Service centre. displayed again when the ignition is switched
off.
84
Displays Controls
Fuel gauge Odometer and trip distance

Vehicle incline can lead to fluc‐ recorder
tuations in the display.
Display
Depending on the equipment,
the arrow next to the petrol ▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
pump symbol shows on which ▷ Trip distance recorder, ar‐
side of the vehicle the petrol tank flap is. row 2.
Information on refuelling, see page 194.
Show/reset distance
Revolution counter Press the button.
It is vital to avoid engine speeds in the red ▷ When the ignition is off, the
warning zone. In this zone, the fuel supply is in‐ time, outside temperature
terrupted to protect the engine. and odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is on, the
trip distance recorder is re‐
Engine oil temperature set.
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is
located at a low temperature
value. Drive with moderate Outside temperature
engine speed and vehicle
speed. If the display drops to
+3 ℃/+37 ℉ or lower, a signal
▷ Normal operating temperature: the needle
sounds.
is located in the centre or left half of the
temperature display. A Check Control message is
displayed.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is located at a high
temperature value. A check control mes‐ There is an increased risk of black ice.
sage is also displayed.
Danger of icy roads
Even at temperatures above
+3 ℃/+37 ℉, there can be an increased danger
Coolant temperature of icy roads.
If the coolant and therefore the engine become To reduce the risk of an accident, you should
too hot, a check control message is displayed. always drive carefully in potentially icy areas,
Check coolant level, see page 211. for example bridges and shaded roads.◀
85
Controls Displays
Time 3. "Analogue add. displays"
The time is shown at the bottom

of the instrument cluster.
Current fuel consumption
Setting the time and time for‐
mat, see page 93. Instrument cluster
Shows the momentary fuel con‐
sumption. It is possible to check
Date the economy and environmental
The date is displayed on the on- compatibility of your driving
board computer. style.
Setting the time date and date
format, see page 93. Instrument cluster with extended
functionality
Shows the momentary fuel con‐
Range sumption. It is possible to check
the economy and environmental
Display compatibility of your driving
If there is a small remaining style.
range:
▷ A check control message is Displaying the current fuel
briefly displayed. consumption
▷ The on-board computer 1. "Settings"
shows the remaining range. 2. "Instr. cluster display"
▷ With fast cornering, for instance, the en‐ 3. "Analogue add. displays"
gine function is not always ensured.
The bar gauge for the current fuel consump‐
If the range drops below approximately 50 km, tion is shown in the instrument cluster.
30 miles the check control message is contin‐
ually displayed.
Refuel in good time Energy recuperation
If the range drops below 50 km, 30 miles, Display
you should refuel as soon as possible, or en‐
gine function may be impaired and damage In the coasting mode, the kinetic
may occur.◀ energy of the vehicle is conver‐
ted into electrical energy. The
vehicle battery is partially
Displaying the range
charged and fuel consumption
Depending on equipment, the range can be can be lowered.
shown as a bar display in the instrument clus‐
ter.
1. "Settings"
2. "Instr. cluster display"
86
Displays Controls
Service requirements Symbols
Principle Sym‐ Description

bols
The distance to be driven or time to the next
maintenance is displayed briefly after switch‐ No servicing is currently needed.
ing on the ignition briefly in the instrument
cluster.
The current service requirements can be read Maintenance or an inspection re‐
by the service advisor from the remote control. quired by law is due soon.
Display Servicing is overdue.

Data on the service status or on statutory in‐
spections for your vehicle are sent to the Serv‐
ice centre automatically when a service or in‐
Entering deadlines
spection is imminent.
Enter deadlines for prescribed statutory in‐
Detailed information on service spections.
requirements Ensure that the date and time of the vehicle
More detailed information on the scope of are set correctly.
maintenance can be displayed on the Control On the Control Display:
Display.
2. "Vehicle status"
1. "Vehicle information" 3. "Service requirements"
2. "Vehicle status" 4. "§ vehicle inspection"
3. "Service requirements" 5. "Date:"
Essential maintenance routines and any 6. Adjust the settings.
statutory inspections required are dis‐
7. Confirm.
played.
The date input is saved.
4. Select an entry to display more detailed in‐
formation.
Automatic Service notification
Data on the service status or on statutory in‐
spections for the vehicle are transmitted to the
Service Centre automatically when a service or
inspection is imminent.
It can be checked when the Service Centre
was notified.
2. "Vehicle status"
87
Controls Displays
3. Calling up "Options". Shift point indicator

4. "Last Teleservice Call"
Principle
Service history The system recommends the most efficient
gear for the current driving situation.
General
The shift point indicator is active in the manual
Have maintenance work carried out by the mode of the Steptronic transmission and man‐
Service centre and entered in the vehicle data. ual gearbox depending on equipment and
The entries are, just like a service booklet, evi‐ country version.
dence of regular maintenance.
Information on up or downshifting are dis‐
The maintenance visits entered can be shown played on the instrument cluster.
on the control display. Operation is available as
soon as a maintenance visit has been entered Manual gearbox: displays
in the vehicle data.
Symbol Description
Displaying service history
Most efficient gear is engaged.
2. "Vehicle status" Shift up into most efficient gear.
3. "Service requirements"
4. "Service history" Shift down into most efficient gear.
Maintenance visits carried out are shown.
5. Select an entry to display more detailed in‐
formation. Shift to neutral.
Symbols
Sym‐ Description
Steptronic transmission: displays
bols
Example Description
Green: maintenance has been car‐
Most efficient gear is engaged.
ried out on time.
Yellow: maintenance has been car‐

Shift to a more efficient gear.
ried out with a delay.
Maintenance has not been carried

out.
88
Displays Controls
Speed Limit Information with The system supports the driver and does not
replace the human eye.◀
No Passing Information
Principle Overview
Speed Limit Information Camera

Speed Limit Information displays using a sym‐
bol in the shape of a traffic sign in the instru‐
ment cluster, the currently detected speed
limit. The camera in the area of the interior
rear-view mirror detects traffic signs at the
edge of the road as well as variable overhead
sign posts. Traffic signs with additional sym‐
bols, for example, when wet, are also com‐
pared with data internal to the vehicle, for ex‐
ample the rain sensor, and displayed, The camera is in the area of the base of the
depending on the situation. The system con‐ rear-view mirror.
siders the information stored in the navigation
system and also displays the speed limits Keep the windscreen clean and clear in the
present on unmarked sections of road. area in front of the rear view mirror.
No Passing Information Switching on/off

No Passing Information displays with corre‐ On the Control Display:
sponding symbols in the instrument cluster no
passing restrictions and their removal detected 1. "Settings"
by the camera. The system only considers no 2. "Instr. cluster display"
passing restrictions and lifting the restriction 3. "Limit info"
made known by signage.
If Speed Limit Information is switched on, this
No display: can be displayed through the on-board com‐
▷ In countries in which no passing is primar‐ puter on the information display in the instru‐
ily shown by road markings. ment cluster.
▷ On routes without signage. No Passing Information is displayed together
▷ On level crossings, carriageway markings with activated Speed Limit information.
or other situations which would not indi‐
cate an unsigned no passing restriction. Display
The following appears in the instrument clus‐
Information ter:
Speed limits and no overtaking for trailer oper‐
ation are not shown. Speed Limit Information
Personal assessment Present speed limit.
The system is no substitute for your per‐ Speed limit cancelled - for Ger‐
sonal assessment of the traffic situation. man motorways.
89
Controls Displays
Speed limit information unavail‐ ▷ During the calibration process of the cam‐
able. era immediately after the vehicle is sup‐
plied.
The Speed Limit Information can also be dis‐ Selection lists in the
played in the Head-Up Display. instrument cluster
No Passing Information Principle
▷ No passing restriction. Depending on equipment, the following can be
▷ End of no passing restric‐ displayed or operated via the buttons and the
tion. knurled wheel on the steering wheel and using
the displays in the instrument cluster and
▷ No Passing Information un‐
Head-Up Display:
available.
▷ Current audio source.
The No Passing Information can also be shown ▷ Repeat dialling for telephone.
in the Head-Up Display.
▷ Activating the voice control system.
System limits In addition, programs of the drive experience

switch are shown.
The function may be disabled or inaccurate
under certain conditions, for example:
Display
▷ In thick fog and heavy rain or snow.
▷ If road signs are obscured.
▷ If the vehicle is moving too close to the ve‐
hicle ahead.
▷ With bright light from oncoming traffic.
▷ When the windscreen in front of the inte‐
rior mirror is covered with condensation,
dirt, stickers, labels, etc.
▷ Due to possible wrong detections of the
camera. Depending on equipment, the list in the instru‐
ment cluster may differ from what is displayed.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are wrong.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ If there are deviations in relation to the nav‐
igation, for example due to changes in the
road routing.
▷ On overtaking buses or trucks with speed
stickers.
▷ If traffic signs do not correspond to the
standard.
90
Displays Controls
Activating the list and entering a Overview of the information

setting Repeated pressing of the button on the turn in‐
dicator lever shows the following information
on the information display:
▷ Range.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Current consumption.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Speed Limit Information.
Turn the knurled wheel on the right-hand side ▷ Time of arrival.
of the steering wheel to activate the corre‐
sponding list. With activated route guidance in the navi‐
gation system.
Using the knurled wheel, select the desired
setting and confirm by pressing the knurled ▷ Distance to destination
wheel. With activated route guidance in the navi‐
gation system.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
On-board computer
Setting displays for the information
Display in the information display display
Depending on the equipment, it can be set
The information from the on-
which displays of the on-board computer can
board computer is displayed in
be called up on the information display in the
the information display in the in‐
instrument cluster.
strument cluster.
1. "Settings"
Calling up information on the
information display
3. Select the desired displays.
Detailed information
Range
Displays the estimated range available with the
remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 30 km, 20 miles.
Press the on-board computer button on the If the fuel provides a range of less than 80 km,
turn indicator lever. 45 miles, the colour of the display changes.
Information is displayed on the information dis‐
play in the instrument cluster.
91
Controls Displays
Average fuel consumption Resetting the journey computer

The average consumption is calculated for the On the Control Display:
period since the engine was last started.
The average consumption is calculated on the
2. "Trip computer"
route travelled since the on-board computer is
last reset. 3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Reset automatically": all values are reset if
Average speed the vehicle is at a standstill for approxi‐
The calculation of average speed ignores any mately four hours.
stationary periods where the engine was
switched off manually. Display on the Control Display
Display the on-board computer or journey
Resetting average values computer on the Control Display.
Keep the on-board computer button pressed 1. "Vehicle information"
on the turn indicator lever.
2. "On-board computer" or "Trip computer"
Distance to destination
Resetting fuel consumption or speed
The remaining distance to the destination is
displayed if a destination was entered in the On the Control Display:
navigation system before the start of the jour‐ 1. "Vehicle information"
ney.
2. "On-board computer"
The distance to the destination is automati‐
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
cally adopted.
4. "Yes"
Arrival time
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination was
Sport displays
entered in the navigation system
Principle
before the start of the journey.
On the Control Display the current values for
A precondition is that the time is
power and torque are shown with the relevant
correctly set.
equipment.
Speed Limit Information Show Sport displays on the Control

Description of speed limit information, see Display
page 89. 1. "Vehicle information"
2. "Sport displays"
Journey computer
Two types of on-board computer are available.
▷ "On-board computer": values can be reset Speed warning
any number of times.
▷ "Trip computer": values deliver an over‐
Principle
view of the current trip. Display of a speed at which a warning is to be
issued when reached.
92
Displays Controls
Repeat warning if the set speed limit was un‐ 3. "Time zone:"
dershot once by at least 5 km/h/3 mph. 4. Select desired time zone.
The time zone is saved.
Displaying, setting or altering the
speed warning
Setting the time
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings" 2. "Time/date"
2. "Speed" 3. "Time:"
3. "Warning at:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
4. Turn the Controller until the desired speed are displayed.
is displayed. 5. Press the controller.
5. Press the Controller. 6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
Speed warning is stored. nutes are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating speed warning
The time is saved.
1. "Settings" Setting the time format

2. "Speed" 1. "Settings"
3. "Warning" 2. "Time/date"
4. Press the Controller. 3. "Format:"

4. Select the desired format.
Saving actual speed as speed warning The time format is saved.
Automatic time setting
1. "Settings"
Depending on equipment, the time, date and, if
2. "Speed"
necessary, time zone are updated automati‐
3. "Select current speed" cally.
4. Press the Controller.
1. "Settings"
The current driving speed is saved as the
2. "Time/date"
speed warning.
3. "Automatic time setting"
Settings on the control Date

display Setting the date
1. "Settings"
Time
2. "Time/date"
Setting the time zone 3. "Date:"
1. "Settings" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
2. "Time/date" displayed.
93
Controls Displays
5. Press the controller. Brightness

6. Make the setting for month and year ac‐
cordingly. Adjusting brightness
The date is saved. Adjusting brightness of Control Display:
1. "Settings"
Setting the date format
2. "Control display"
1. "Settings"
3. "Brightness"
2. "Time/date"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
3. "Format:" ness is obtained.
4. Select the desired format. 5. Press the Controller.
The date format is saved. The setting is stored for the currently used
profile.
Language
Depending on the lighting conditions, bright‐
ness control might not be immediately recog‐
Setting the language
nisable.
To set the language on the Control Display:
1. "Settings" Driver assistance info

2. "Language/units"
Display on the control display:
3. "Language:"
Explanations on the driver assistance systems
4. Select the desired language. can be shown when activating on the control
The setting is stored for the currently used display.
profile.
1. "Settings"
Setting the speech dialogue 2. "Control display"
Voice dialogue for the voice control system, 3. "Driver assistance info"
see page 25.
Units of measure Head-Up Display

Setting the units of measure Principle
To set the units of measure for fuel consump‐
tion, distance covered/remaining range, and
temperature:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The setting is stored for the currently used
profile. The system projects important information
into the field of vision of the driver, for example
speed.
94
Displays Controls
The driver can register this information without Adjusting brightness

having to divert attention from the road. The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient light.
Visibility of the display The base setting can be adjusted manually.
Visibility of the display on the Head-Up Display On the Control Display:
is influenced by the following factors:
1. "Settings"
▷ Certain seat positions.
2. "Head-up display"
▷ Items on the Head-Up Display cover.
3. "Brightness"
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarisation filters.
4. Turn the Controller.
▷ Wet road.
The brightness of the Head-Up Display can be
▷ Unfavourable lighting conditions. additionally influenced using the instrument
If the image is shown distorted, have the basic lighting if the low-beam headlights are
settings checked. switched on.
Switching on/off profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display" Adjusting height
3. "Head-up display" On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
Display
Overview 3. "Height"
▷ Speed. 4. Turn the Controller.
▷ Navigation system. The setting is stored for the currently used
▷ Check control messages. profile.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.

Setting rotation
▷ Driver assistance systems. On the Control Display:
Some of this information is only shown briefly
when needed. 1. "Settings"
Selecting displays on the Head-Up 3. "Rotation"
Display 4. Turn the Controller.
1. "Settings" profile.
Special windscreen
3. "Information displayed"
The windscreen constitutes part of the sys‐
4. Select desired display on Head-Up Dis‐ tem.
play.
The shape of the windscreen enables a precise
The setting is stored for the currently used projection.
profile.
95
Controls Displays
A film in the windscreen prevents double im‐

ages occurring.
For this reason, have the special windscreen
replaced only by the Service centre.
96
Lights Controls
Lights
Vehicle equipment Side lights/low-beam
This chapter describes all standard, national headlights, driving lights
and special equipment provided in the model control
therefore also described, for example the se‐ General
lected special equipment or national version. Switch setting: 0, ,
If the driver's door is opened with the ignition
and systems.
switched off, the exterior lights are automati‐
cally switched off with these switch settings.
Overview Side lights

Switch position : the vehicle is illumina‐
ted all around, for example when parking.
You should not leave the side lights on for lon‐
ger periods of time, since the vehicle battery
could discharge and you might not have
enough power to start the engine.
To park, it is better to switch on the one-sided
parking light, see page 98.
1 Rear fog lights Low-beam headlights

2 Front fog lights Switch position with the ignition switched
3 Depending on equipment: automatic driv‐ on: low-beam headlights are illuminated.
ing lights control, adaptive headlights, high
beam assistance, welcome light, daytime Welcome lights
driving lights On parking the vehicle, leave the switch in po‐
4 Lights off, daytime driving lights sition or : the side lights and interior
5 Parking lights light illuminate briefly when unlocking the vehi‐
cle, possibly dependent on the ambient bright‐
6 Depending on equipment: low-beam head‐
ness.
lights, welcome light, high beam assis‐
tance
Activating/deactivating
7 Headlight beam throw adjustment
8 Instrument lighting
1. "Settings"
2. "Lights"
3. "Welcome light"
profile.
97
Controls Lights
Headlight courtesy delay feature Activating/deactivating

If the headlight flasher is activated after switch‐ In some countries daytime driving lights are
ing off the radio ready state, the low-beam compulsory, which is why the daytime driving
headlights illuminate and remain on for a cer‐ lights cannot be deactivated.
tain time. On the Control Display:
Setting the duration 1. "Settings"

On the Control Display: 2. "Lights"
3. "Daytime driving lights"
1. "Settings"
2. "Lights"
profile.
3. "Home lights:"
4. Set the duration. Parking lights
profile.
Automatic driving lights control

Switch position : depending on ambient
brightness, the system switches the low-beam
headlights off and on automatically, for exam‐
ple in a tunnel, at twilight and in rain or snow.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
illuminated. The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
When emerging from tunnels in daylight, low-
beam headlights are not switched off immedi‐ Switching on
ately, but only after approximately 2 minutes. With the ignition switched off, push the lever
The headlights may also come on when the upwards or downwards beyond the resistance
sun is sitting low in a blue sky. point for approximately 2 seconds.
The low-beam headlights always remain on
when the fog lights are switched on. Switching off
Press the lever briefly in the opposite direction
Personal responsibility
as far as the resistance point.
The driving lights control function is no
substitute for your individual judgement of
when it is necessary to switch on the lights.
Adaptive Headlights
The sensors are unable, for instance, to recog‐
nise fog or hazy weather. In such situations, Principle
switch on the lights manually to avoid any
Adaptive Headlights is a variable headlight
safety risk.◀
control system that makes it possible to illumi‐
nate the road surface responsively.
Daytime driving lights The beams from the headlights follow the road
The daytime driving lights illuminate with igni‐ ahead on the basis of the steering angle and
tion switched on in position 0 or . other parameters.
98
Lights Controls
Depending on the speed, the variable light dis‐ 0 / 1 = 1 to 2 persons without luggage.
tribution ensures even better illumination of 1 / 1 = 5 persons without luggage.
the roadway.
1 / 2 = 5 persons with luggage.
The light distribution is automatically adapted
2 / 2 = 1 person, boot fully loaded.
to the speed. The city light is active as of a
speed of less than 50 km/h, 30 mph. The mo‐
torway light is switched on at a speed higher
than 110 km/h, 68 mph after approximately High-beam assistance
30 seconds or as of a speed of 140 km/h,
87 mph. Principle
In sharp turns up to a specified speed, for ex‐ When low-beam headlights are switched on,
ample in hairpin bends or when cornering, ei‐ this system automatically switches the high-
ther the fog lights or the cornering light beam headlights on and off or fades out the
switches on. The lights up the inside of the areas which dazzle oncoming vehicles. This
curves better. process is controlled by a camera on the front
of the rear-view mirror. The assistant ensures
Activating that the high-beam headlights are switched on
whenever the traffic situation allows. You can
Switch position with the ignition switched
also control the lights yourself at any time and
on.
switch them on and off as usual.
So as not to dazzle oncoming vehicles, the
adaptive cornering light does not swivel to the Activating
driver's side when stationary.
A cornering light is activated automatically de‐
pending on the steering angle or use of the
turn indicators.
The cornering light may be switched on when
driving in reverse, irrespective of the steering
angle.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. 1. Depending on equipment, turn the light
Adaptive Headlights are faulty or have failed. switch to position or .
Have the system checked as soon as possible. 2. Press the button on the turn indicator
lever, arrow.
The indicator light in the instrument
Headlight beam throw cluster is illuminated.
adjustment
When the low-beam headlights are on, the
With halogen headlights adjust the beam
beam is dipped and returned to full beam auto‐
throw of the low-beam headlights manually in
matically.
accordance with the vehicle load. Otherwise,
the glare will disturb drivers of oncoming vehi‐ The system responds to light from oncoming
cles. traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
Values applicable when towing a trailer:
99
Controls Lights
adequate illumination, for example in built-up ▷ During extremely unfavourable weather

areas. conditions such as fog or heavy precipita‐
tion.
The blue indicator light in the instru‐
ment cluster illuminates if the high ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
beam is switched on by the system. as pedestrians, cyclists or horseback riders
Depending on the version of the system instal‐ or carts, and when trains or ships are close
led in the vehicle, it may be that the high beam to the road, or when game are passing
is not switched off for oncoming vehicles, but across the road.
only the areas which dazzle the oncoming ve‐ ▷ On narrow bends, steep uphill or downhill
hicles are faded out. In this case, the blue indi‐ gradients, at traffic junctions or if your view
cator light continues to illuminate. of oncoming vehicles on a motorway is ob‐
structed.
Raising and dipping manually ▷ In poorly-lit towns and where there are very
reflective signs.
▷ At low road speeds.
▷ When the windscreen in front of the inte‐
dirt, stickers, labels, etc.
Fog lights
▷ High-beam headlights on, arrow 1. Front fog lights
▷ High-beam headlights off / headlight The side lights or low-beam headlights must
flasher, arrow 2. be switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator
The high beam assistance can be deactivated
light is illuminated.
by manually raising and dipping. To reactivate
high-beam assistance, press the button on the If automatic driving lights control, see page 98,
turn indicator lever. has been activated, the low-beam headlights
illuminate automatically when the front fog
System limits lights are switched on.
Guiding fog lights
The high-beam assistance cannot re‐
place the personal decision to use the high In switch position , a guide fog light for a
beam. In such situations you should dip the wider illumination is also activated up to a
headlights manually in order not to create a speed of 110 km/h, 68 mph.
safety hazard.◀
Rear fog lights
In the following situations, the system will not
The low-beam headlights or front fog lights
operate or its operation will be impaired and
must be switched on.
your intervention may be required:
Press the button. The yellow indicator
light is illuminated.
100
Lights Controls
If automatic driving lights control, see page 98, The brightness of some equipment is influ‐
has been activated, the low-beam headlights enced by the knurled wheel for the instrument
come on automatically when the rear fog lights lighting.
are switched on.
Left-hand/right-hand traffic
General
Measures to prevent the headlights from daz‐
zling oncoming vehicles are necessary if you
take the vehicle into countries in which the op‐
posite rule of the road applies. Your Service
1 Interior light
Centre can provide the appropriate light bend‐
ers that can be affixed to the headlight lenses. 2 Reading light
Proceed in accordance with the enclosed in‐
formation when affixing the light benders to Switching the interior light on and off
the headlights. manually
Press the button.
Adaptive Headlights
When driving in a country where you drive on
To switch off permanently: press the button for
the opposite side of the road from the country
approximately three seconds.
the car is licensed, do not drive with the
setting, otherwise this could cause a dazzling Switch on again: press button.
effect from the cornering light.
Reading lights
Press the button.
Instrument lighting
There are reading lights located at the front
Adjusting and in the rear beside the interior lights.
The brightness can only be ad‐
justed when the side lights or Ambient lighting
the low-beam headlights are Depending on the equipment, the lighting in
switched on. the interior can be set for a few lights.
The brightness can be set using
the knurled wheel. Selecting colour scheme
1. "Settings"
Interior light 2. "Lights"
General 3. "Ambient:"
The interior light, the footwell lights, door entry 4. Select the desired setting.
lighting and the courtesy lighting are controlled If the colour scheme of the line is selected and
automatically. the welcome light is activated, the welcome
101
Controls Lights
light is the same colour as the line when re‐

leased.
Adjusting brightness
The brightness of the ambient light can be set
over the knurled wheel for the instrument light‐
ing or on the Control Display.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lights"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjusting brightness.
102
Security Controls
Security
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 3 Head airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 4 Side airbag
Front airbags Head airbags

Front airbags protect the driver and front pas‐ The head airbag supports the head in the
senger in the event of a head-on collision event of a side-on collision.
where the action of the seat belts alone would
be insufficient. Protective effect
Airbags are not activated by every collision, for
Side airbags example not in more minor accidents and rear-
In a side-on crash, the side airbag supports the end collisions.
body from the side in the chest and pelvic area.
Information for optimal protective effect
of the airbags
103
Controls Security
▷ Keep your distance from the airbags. ▷ Do not modify individual components of
▷ Always grip the steering wheel on the rim, the system or its wiring in any way. This in‐
with your hands in the 3 o'clock and cludes the covers on the steering wheel,
9 o'clock positions, to minimise the risk of instrument cluster, seats and roof posts as
injury to the hands or arms in the event of well as the sides of the roof lining.◀
the airbag being triggered. Even if all these information are complied with,
▷ No other persons, pets or objects should depending on the circumstances in which an
be held or permitted to remain between accident occurs, certain injuries as a result of
the airbag and yourself. contact with the airbag cannot be entirely ruled
out.
▷ Do not use the front airbag cover on the
front passenger's side as a tray. The noise caused by the deployment of an air‐
bag may lead to brief and generally temporary
▷ Keep the dashboard and windscreen in the
hearing loss in vehicle occupants sensitive to
area of the passenger's side free, in other
noise.
words do not attach adhesive foil or covers
and do not fit brackets or cables, for exam‐ Fault, taking the airbags out of use and
ple for navigation devices or mobile tele‐ after they have been triggered
phones. Avoid touching the system's components im‐
▷ Make sure that the front passenger adopts mediately after it has been triggered, as there
a correct seated position, in other words is a risk of sustaining burns.
leaves his or her feet in the footwell and Only commission the Service centre or author‐
does not rest feet or legs on the instrument ised workshops with checking, repairing or dis‐
cluster, otherwise he/she could sustain leg mantling and scrapping airbag generators, as
injuries in the event of the front airbag be‐ the Service centre or authorised workshops
ing triggered. have the required legal permits for handling ex‐
▷ Do not fit seat covers, cushions or other plosives.
objects not specifically approved for seats Any careless or unskilled interference with the
with integral side airbags to the front seats. system could lead to its failure or to accidental
▷ Do not hang items of clothing such as triggering with the risk of injury.◀
coats or jackets over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that vehicle occupants keep Functional readiness of the airbag
their heads away from the side airbag and system
do not lean against the head airbag. Other‐ When the ignition is switched on, the
wise they could be injured should the air‐ warning light in the instrument cluster
bags deploy. briefly illuminates and so shows the
▷ Do not dismantle the airbag system. functional readiness of the entire airbag sys‐
▷ Do not dismantle the steering wheel. tem and the belt tensioner.
▷ Never attach any material to the airbag
covers with adhesive; never place material Airbag system disrupted
over them or modify them in any way. ▷ Warning light does not illuminate after the
ignition is switched on.
▷ Warning light is permanently illuminated.
104
Security Controls
Immediately check airbag system when passenger airbags so that they are triggered as
there is a fault intended in the event of an accident.
Immediately check airbag system when there The airbag condition is displayed on the check
is a fault, otherwise there is a risk that the sys‐ lamp on the headlining, see page 105.
tem does not function as expected in an acci‐
dent in spite of corresponding seriousness of Activating the front passenger airbags
the accident.◀
Insert the key and press inwards
where necessary.
Not for Australia/New Zealand: Key While the key is pressed in‐
switch for front passenger airbags wards, turn it to the ON position
as far as it will go. Once the stop
General position has been reached, remove the key.
The front passenger airbags are reactivated
and can deploy correctly if the need arises.
Key switch in end position
Make sure that the key switch is in the
corresponding end position. Otherwise the air‐
bags are not activated/deactivated.◀
Indicator light for front passenger

The front and side airbags for the front pas‐
airbags
senger can be deactivated and reactivated us‐
ing the integrated key from the remote control.
Deactivating the front passenger

airbags
Insert the key and press inwards
where necessary.
While the key is pressed in‐
wards, turn it to the OFF posi‐
tion as far as it will go. Once the The indicator light for the front passenger air‐
stop position has been reached, remove the bags shows the operating status of the front
key. passenger airbags.
The front passenger airbags are deactivated. After switching on the ignition, the light illumi‐
The driver's airbags remain active. nates briefly and then shows whether the air‐
bags are activated or deactivated.
Key switch in end position
Make sure that the key switch is in the ▷ When front passenger air‐
corresponding end position. Otherwise the air‐ bags are deactivated, the in‐
bags are not activated/deactivated.◀ dicator light remains illumi‐
nated.
If a child restraint system is no longer fitted in
the front passenger's seat, reactivate the front
105
Controls Security
▷ When front passenger airbags are activa‐ Status control display

ted, the indicator light is not illuminated. The tyre and system status is denoted by the
wheel colour and some text on the Control Dis‐
play.
Tyre Pressure Monitor TPM
All wheels green
Principle System is active and is warning about the tyre
The system monitors the tyre pressure in the inflation pressures stored during the last reset.
four fitted tyres. The system warns if the infla‐
tion pressure in one or more tyres has fallen One wheel yellow
considerably. To do this, the sensors in the A flat tyre or major loss of tyre inflation pres‐
tyre valves measure the tyre pressure and tyre sure in the tyre shown.
temperatures.
All wheels yellow
Information A flat tyre or major loss of tyre inflation pres‐
Tyre damage due to external effect sure in several tyres.
No warning can be given of extreme, se‐
Wheels grey
rious sudden tyre failure caused by external
factors.◀ The system cannot detect a flat tyre. The rea‐
sons for this are:
To operate the system, also follow the other
▷ System reset is performed.
information and instructions under tyre filling
pressure, see page 198. ▷ Malfunction.
Operating requirements Additional information

For the system, a reset must have been made The current tyre inflation pressure and, possi‐
with the correct tyre inflation pressure, other‐ bly, tyre temperatures are also displayed in the
wise reliable signalling of a flat tyre cannot be status control display. The values shown are
assured. current values and may change due to the ef‐
fect of driving mode or weathering.
Reset the system after adjusting the tyre pres‐
sure to a new value and after a tyre or wheel
Running reset
change.
Reset the system after adjusting the tyre pres‐
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
sure to a new value and after a tyre or wheel
guarantee the system functions without errors.
change.
Status display On the Control Display and on the vehicle:
The current status of the Tyre Pressure Moni‐ 1. "Vehicle information"
tor TPM can be shown on the control display, 2. "Vehicle status"
for example whether the TPM is active.
3. "Perform reset"
1. "Vehicle information" 4. Start the engine – do not drive off.
2. "Vehicle status" 5. Resetting tyre pressure: "Perform reset".
3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor (RDC)" 6. Drive off.
The status is displayed.
106
Security Controls
The wheels are shown grey and the status ap‐ What to do in the event of a flat tyre
pears on the display.
After driving for a short time over 30 km/h, Standard tyres
19 mph the set tyre inflation pressures are ac‐ 1. Identify the damaged tyre.
cepted as target values. The reset is run auto‐ Do this by checking the air pressure in all
matically while the vehicle is in motion. four tyres.
After a successfully concluded reset, the The tyre inflation pressure display of the
wheels are shown in green on the Control Dis‐ Mobility System, see page 202, can be
play and "Tyre Pressure Monitor (RDC) used for this.
active." is shown.
If all four tyres are inflated to the correct
You can interrupt your drive at any time. Reset pressures, the Tyre Pressure Monitor
resumes automatically when you continue might not have been reset. Run reset
your journey.
If it is not possible to identify, contact a
Service Centre.
Message if tyre inflation pressure is
low 2. Fix puncture on damaged tyre, with Mobi‐
lity System if available.
The yellow warning light is illuminated.
A check control message is displayed.
Run-flat tyres
▷ There is a flat tyre or substantial
loss of tyre pressure. Top speed
▷ No reset has been done to the system. If a tyre has punctured you can continue your
Consequently, the system warns of the journey, driving at speeds up to a maximum of
tyre pressures of the last reset. 80 km/h, 50 mph.
1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the Continuing a journey with a flat tyre
vehicle. Avoid violent or sudden braking
and steering manoeuvres. If you continue a journey with a flat tyre:
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped 1. Avoid violent or sudden braking and steer‐
with standard tyres or run-flat tyres. ing manoeuvres.
The symbol identifying run-flat tyres, see 2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph
page 201, is the circle with the letters RSC any longer.
on the tyre sidewall. 3. As soon as you get an opportunity, check
Do not continue a journey without run- the tyre pressure in all four tyres.
flat tyres If all four tyres are inflated to the correct
Do not continue your journey if the vehicle is pressures, the Tyre Pressure Monitor
not equipped with run-flat tyres, otherwise a might not have been reset. Then run reset.
serious accident could occur.◀ Maximum possible distance with tyres entirely
deflated:
When signalling that the tyre inflation pressure
is low, the Dynamic Stability Control DSC may The possible distance with a flat tyre depends
be switched on. on the load and strain on the vehicle during the
journey.
107
Controls Security
With a moderate vehicle load, the possible dis‐ ▷ System has detected a wheel change, but
tance travelled is approximately 80 km, no reset has been run.
50 miles. ▷ Filling was not performed according to the
When driving with damaged tyres, the vehicle regulations.
handling changes, for example quicker loss of ▷ The tyre inflation pressure has dropped
traction when braking, longer stopping dis‐ compared to the last confirmation.
tance and modified self-steering behaviour.
If that is the case:
Adapt driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt
steering or driving over obstacles, for example ▷ Check the tyre pressure and adjust as nec‐
curbs, potholes etc. essary.
As the possible distance largely depends on ▷ Reset the system after a wheel change.
the strain on the vehicle during the journey,
this can be shorter, or longer if the vehicle is System limits
driven carefully, according to speed, road con‐ The system is not working correctly if no reset
dition, outside temperature, load etc. has been run, for example, a flat tyre is repor‐
Continuing a journey with a flat tyre ted in spite of the correct tyre inflation pres‐
sure.
Drive with care and do not exceed a
speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph. Tyre inflation pressure depends on the tem‐
perature of the tyre. By increasing tyre temper‐
If tyre pressure has fallen, vehicle handling ature, for example, when driving or with solar
changes, for example reduced directional sta‐ radiation, the tyre inflation pressure increases.
bility when braking, longer stopping distance Tyre inflation pressure decreases if the tyre
and modified self-steering behaviour.◀ temperature drops. Through this behaviour, a
Continuing a journey with a flat tyre and warning may be triggered if there are major
trailer temperature drops, due to the given warning
limits.
When a trailer is being towed, heavy trailers in
particular can start to snake. For this reason,
Malfunction
do not exceed 60 km/h, 35 mph, otherwise
there is a danger that accidents might occur.◀ The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A check
Final tyre failure control message is displayed. No flat
Vibration or loud noises while driving tyres or loss of tyre pressure can be detected.
may be an indication that the tyre has finally
Displayed in the following situations:
failed. Reduce your speed and stop, otherwise
sections of the tyre could become detached ▷ Wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
and cause an accident. Do not drive the vehicle have the vehicle checked by the Service
any further; contact your Service Centre in‐ Centre if necessary.
stead.◀ ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
the Service Centre.
Message with required tyre inflation ▷ TPM has not completed a reset. Run a re‐
pressure test set of the system again.
In such situations, a check control message is ▷ Fault due to systems or devices with the
displayed: same frequency: the system is automati‐
108
Security Controls
cally reactivated upon leaving the field of On the Control Display:

interference.
2. "Vehicle status"
Runflat indicator RPA 3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine – do not drive off.
Principle
5. Start the initialisation with "Perform reset".
The system identifies a loss of tyre pressure
6. Drive off.
by comparing the speeds of rotation of the in‐
dividual wheels while the vehicle is in motion. Initialising is completed while the vehicle is in
motion; this process can be interrupted at any
If a tyre loses pressure, its diameter changes.
time.
This in turn alters the rotational speed of the
corresponding wheel. This is detected and re‐ Initialising resumes automatically when you
ported as a flat tyre. continue your journey.
The system does not measure the tyre pres‐
Indication of a flat tyre
sures as such.
The yellow warning light is illuminated.
Operating requirements A check control message is displayed.
The system must have been initialised with There is a flat tyre or substantial loss of
correct tyre inflation pressure, otherwise relia‐ tyre pressure.
ble signalling of a flat tyre cannot be assured.
Each time the tyre pressure is adjusted or a 1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the
tyre or wheel is changed, initialise the system vehicle. Avoid violent or sudden braking
again. and steering manoeuvres.
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped
Status display with standard tyres or run-flat tyres.
The current status of the runflat indicator can The symbol identifying run-flat tyres, see
be shown on the Control Display, for example page 201, is the circle with the letters RSC
whether the runflat indicator is active. on the tyre side wall.
On the Control Display: Do not continue a journey without run-
flat tyres
Do not continue your journey if the vehicle is
2. "Vehicle status"
not equipped with run-flat tyres, otherwise a
3. "Flat Tyre Monitor (RPA)" serious accident could occur.◀
The status is displayed.
It is possible that Dynamic Stability Control
DSC is activated as soon as the message for a
Initialising
puncture appears.
On initialisation, the current tyre pressures are
stored as a reference for detection of a flat System limits
tyre. The initialisation is started by confirming
the correct tyre inflation pressures. Sudden tyre damage
When driving with snow chains fitted, do not No warning can be given of extreme,
initialise the system. sudden tyre failure caused by external fac‐
tors.◀
109
Controls Security
A natural, even loss of tyre pressure in all four 3. As soon as you get an opportunity, check
tyres that occurs over time is not detected. the tyre pressure in all four tyres.
Consequently, check the tyre pressures at reg‐ If all four tyres are inflated to the correct
ular intervals. pressures, the runflat indicator might not
In the following situations, the system could be have been initialised. In this case initialise
slow to respond or operate incorrectly: the system.
▷ If the system has not been initialised. Maximum possible distance with tyres entirely
▷ When driving on snow-covered or slippery deflated:
surfaces. The possible distance with a flat tyre depends
▷ When driving enthusiastically, causing the on the load and strain on the vehicle during the
driven wheels to spin, high lateral accelera‐ journey.
tion. With a moderate vehicle load, the possible dis‐
▷ Driving with snow chains. tance travelled is approximately 80 km,
50 miles.
What to do in the event of a flat tyre When driving with damaged tyres, the vehicle
handling changes, for example quicker loss of
Standard tyres traction when braking, longer stopping dis‐
1. Identify the damaged tyre. tance and modified self-steering behaviour.
Adapt driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
steering or driving over obstacles, for example
four tyres.
curbs, potholes etc.
If all four tyres are inflated to the correct
As the possible distance largely depends on
pressures, the runflat indicator might not
the strain on the vehicle during the journey,
have been initialised. In this case initialise
this can be shorter, or longer if the vehicle is
the system.
driven carefully, according to speed, road con‐
If it is not possible to identify, contact a dition, outside temperature, load etc.
Service centre.
Continuing a journey with a flat tyre
2. Fix the puncture.
Drive with care and do not exceed a
speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph.
Run-flat tyres
If tyre pressure has fallen, vehicle handling
Top speed changes, for example reduced directional sta‐
If a tyre has punctured you can continue your bility when braking, longer stopping distance
journey, driving at speeds up to a maximum of and modified self-steering behaviour.◀
80 km/h, 50 mph. Continuing a journey with a flat tyre and
trailer
Continuing a journey with a flat tyre
When a trailer is being towed, heavy trailers in
If you continue a journey with a flat tyre: particular can start to snake. For this reason,
1. Avoid violent or sudden braking and steer‐ do not exceed 60 km/h, 35 mph, otherwise
ing manoeuvres. there is a danger that accidents might occur.◀
2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph
any longer.
110
Security Controls
Final tyre failure Intelligent Safety button

Vibration or loud noises while driving
may be an indication that the tyre has finally
failed. Reduce your speed and stop, otherwise Camera
sections of the tyre could become detached
and cause an accident. Do not drive the vehicle
any further; contact your Service Centre in‐
stead.◀
Intelligent Safety
Principle
Intelligent Safety permits central operation of The camera is in the area of the base of the
driver assistance systems. rear-view mirror.
Depending on equipment, Intelligent Safety Keep the windscreen clean and clear in the
consists of one or more systems which can area in front of the rear view mirror.
help to avoid the risk of a collision. These sys‐
tems are automatically active after each time Switching on/off
you start the engine with the start/stop button:
The Intelligent Safety Systems are active auto‐
▷ Front-end collision warning, see page 111. matically at the start of each journey.
▷ Person warning, see page 117.
Press button: the systems are
switched off again. LED turns off.
Note
Press button again: the systems are switched
Personal responsibility on. LED is illuminated.
The system is no substitute for your per‐
sonal assessment of the traffic situation. Settings can be adjusted on the Control Dis‐
play.
Observe the traffic situation and area around
the vehicle, otherwise an accident may occur,
in spite of warnings.◀
Forward alert
Overview Depending on the equipment, the forward alert
consists of one of the two systems:
Button in the vehicle ▷ Forward alert with city braking function,
see page 112.
▷ Forward alert with braking function, see
page 114.
111
Controls Security
Front-end collision warning Detection range

with city braking function
Principle
The system can help avoid accidents. If an ac‐
cident cannot be avoided, the system helps to
reduce the collision speed.
The system warns of the possible risk of colli‐
sion and brakes automatically, as necessary.
The automatic braking intervention is done
Objects are taken into account if they are de‐
with limited force and duration.
tected by the system.
The system is controlled by a camera in the
area of the rear-view mirror.
Overview
The front-end collision warning is also avail‐
able if the Cruise Control is disabled.
Button in the vehicle
When deliberately approaching a vehicle, the
front-end collision warning is activated later to
avoid unjustified warnings.
Note
sonal assessment of the traffic situation.
the vehicle, otherwise an accident may occur, Intelligent Safety button
in spite of warnings.◀
General Camera
The system warns from approximately 5 km/h,
approximately 3 mph in two stages of any risk
of collision with vehicles. The timing of these
warnings may vary depending on the current
driving situation.
Up to approximately 60km/h, 35 mph.
The camera is in the area of the base of the

rear-view mirror.
Keep the windscreen clean and clear in the
area in front of the rear view mirror.
112
Security Controls
Switching on/off Symbol Measure
Automatic activation Vehicle illuminates red: advance

warning
The system is automatically activated at the
start of each journey. Increase braking and distance.
Vehicle flashes red and an acoustic

Switching off signal sounds: acute warning
Press the button: the system is System indicates that you must
switched off. LED turns off. brake and/or manoeuvre the vehicle
Press the button again: the system is switched yourself.
on. LED is illuminated.
Advance warning
Setting warning time Warning, for example if a danger of collision is
The warning time can be set using iDrive. anticipated or there is a very short distance to
a vehicle ahead.
1. "Settings"
The driver must intervene personally if there is
2. "Collision warning"
an advance warning.
3. Set the desired time on the Control Dis‐
play. Acute warning with braking function
The selected time is stored for the currently Warning in the event of an immediate collision
used profile. if the vehicle approaches an object with rela‐
tively high differential speed.
Warning with braking function The driver must intervene personally if there is
an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is as‐
Note sisted by slight automatic brake intervention if
Adapting speed and driving style there is a risk of collision.
The warning does not release you from An acute warning can be triggered even with‐
your responsibility to adapt your speed and out a previous advance warning.
driving style to prevailing driving conditions.◀
Brake intervention
Display The warning requires that you have to brake
If there is a risk of collision with a detected ve‐ yourself. Maximum braking force is used dur‐
hicle, a warning symbol is shown in the instru‐ ing a warning. In order for braking force sup‐
ment cluster and in the head-up display. port to be used, it is necessary for the brake to
be pressed sufficiently quickly and powerfully.
In addition, the system may also support with a
small amount of braking if there is the risk of a
collision. The vehicle can be braked at low
speed until it comes to a stop.
Manual gearbox: When brakes are engaged
until it comes to a stop, the engine may shut
off.
113
Controls Security
There will only be brake intervention if Dy‐ ▷ In thick fog, rain, spray or snowfall.
namic Stability Control, DSC is switched on ▷ On sharp bends.
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is not acti‐
▷ When restricting or deactivating vehicle
vated.
stability control systems, for example DSC
Braking can be discontinued either by pressing OFF.
the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the
▷ If, depending on equipment, the field of
steering wheel.
view of the camera in the mirror or the ra‐
Detection of objects can be restricted. Limita‐ dar sensor is soiled or covered.
tions of the detection range and functional re‐
▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine
stricitions are to be considered.
using the start/stop button.
Tow-starting and towing ▷ During the calibration process of the cam‐
When tow-starting or towing, switch off era immediately after the vehicle is sup‐
the intelligent safety systems, otherwise an ac‐ plied.
cident may be caused by the malfunction of ▷ When there is sustained glare effect due to
the brake actuation function of individual sys‐ light opposite, for example the sun low in
tems.◀ the sky.
System limits Sensitivity of the warnings

Your own attentiveness The greater the sensitivity of the warning set‐
System limitations mean that it can occur tings, the more warnings will be displayed. As
that warnings are not issued, are issued too a result, there may be an increased number of
late, or are issued incorrectly. This means that incorrect warnings.
you must pay full attention so that you are able
to intervene actively at any time. Otherwise
there is the risk of an accident.◀ Front-end collision warning
with braking function
Detection range
Principle
The detection ability of the system is limited.
The system can help avoid accidents. If an ac‐
This is why it can occur that no warnings are
cident cannot be avoided, the system helps to
issued or they are issued late.
reduce the collision speed.
It is possible that the following are not detec‐
ted:
sion and brakes automatically, as necessary.
▷ Slow-moving vehicle when approaching at
The brakes are applied automatically with limi‐
high speed.
ted braking force for a limited period.
▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or decelerat‐
When equipped with active Cruise Control with
ing heavily.
Stop & Go function, the front-end collision
▷ Vehicles with unusual rear view. warning is controlled by the radar sensor of the
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead. Cruise Control.
The front-end collision warning is also avail‐
Restrictions of the function able if the Cruise Control is disabled.
The function can be restricted, for example in
114
Security Controls
When deliberately approaching a vehicle, the

front-end collision warning is activated later to
avoid unjustified warnings.
General
The system warns from approximately 5 km/h,
approx. 3 mph in two stages of any possible
risk of collision with vehicles. The time of these
warnings may vary depending on the current
driving situation. A sensor that is dirty or covered can restrict
the detection of vehicles.
Detection range
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Take
care when removing any layers of snow or
ice from the sensor.
▷ Do not cover the field of view of the radar
sensor.
Switching on/off
Automatic activation
Objects are taken into account if they are de‐
start of each journey.
tected by the system.
Switch off
Overview Press the button: the system is
switched off. LED turns off.
Press the button again: the system is switched
Setting warning time

The warning time can be set using iDrive.
1. "Settings"
2. "Collision warning"
3. Set the desired time on the Control Dis‐
play.
Intelligent Safety button
The selected time is stored for the currently
used profile.
Radar sensor
There is a radar sensor in the bumper to detect
vehicles travelling in front.
115
Controls Security
Warning with braking function Brake intervention

The detection of objects can be influeneced by
Note technical system limitations, e. g. pedestrians
Adapting speed and driving style or stationary objects. Limitations of the detec‐
tion range and functional restrictions are to be
The warning does not release you from
considered.
your responsibility to adapt your speed and
driving style to prevailing driving conditions.◀ The warning requires that you have to brake
yourself. Maximum braking force is used dur‐
ing a warning. In order for braking force sup‐
Display
port to be used, it is necessary for the brake to
If there is a risk of collision with a detected ve‐ be pressed sufficiently quickly and powerfully.
hicle, a warning symbol is shown in the instru‐ In addition, the system may also support with
ment cluster and in the head-up display. automatic braking if there is the risk of a colli‐
Symbol Measure sion. The vehicle can be braked until it comes
to a stop.
Vehicle illuminates red: advance
Manual gearbox: When brakes are engaged
warning
Increase braking and distance. off.
Vehicle flashes red and an acoustic There will only be brake intervention if Dy‐
signal sounds: acute warning namic Stability Control, DSC is switched on
System indicates that you must
vated.
brake and/or manoeuvre the vehicle
yourself. Above approximately 210 km/h, approximately
130 mph the braking intervention is done as a
short braking jerk. There is no automatic delay.
Advance warning
Braking can be discontinued either by pressing
Warning, for example if a danger of collision is
the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the
anticipated or there is a very short distance to
steering wheel.
a vehicle ahead.
Tow-starting and towing
The driver must intervene personally if there is
an advance warning. When tow-starting or towing, switch off
the intelligent safety systems, otherwise an ac‐
Acute warning with braking function cident may be caused by the malfunction of
the brake actuation function of individual sys‐
Warning in the event of an immediate collision
tems.◀
if the vehicle approaches an object with rela‐
tively high differential speed.
The driver must intervene personally if there is System limits
an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is as‐ Your own attentiveness
sisted by automatic brake intervention if there System limitations mean that it can occur
is a risk of collision. that warnings are not issued, are issued too
An acute warning can be triggered even with‐ late, or are issued incorrectly. This means that
out a previous advance warning. you must pay full attention so that you are able
to intervene actively at any time. Otherwise
there is the risk of an accident.◀
116
Security Controls
Detection range The system is controlled by the camera in the

The detection ability of the system is limited. area of the rear-view mirror.
This is why it can occur that no warnings are

Note
It is possible that the following are not detec‐ Personal responsibility
ted: The system is no substitute for your per‐
▷ Slow-moving vehicle when approaching at sonal assessment of the traffic situation.
high speed. Observe the traffic situation and area around
▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or decelerat‐ the vehicle, otherwise an accident may occur,
ing heavily. in spite of warnings.◀
▷ Vehicles with unusual rear view.

General
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead.
The system warns with brightness from ap‐
▷ Pedestrians. proximately 10 km/h, approximately 6 mph up
▷ Stationary objects. to approximately 60 km/h, approximately
35 mph of any risk of collision with pedestrians
Restrictions of the function and supports this by briefly applying the
The function can be restricted, for example in brakes before a collision.
the following situations: Here, persons are taken into account if they
▷ In thick fog, rain, spray or snowfall. are located within the detection range of the
system.
▷ On sharp bends.
▷ When restricting or deactivating vehicle Detection range
stability control systems, for example DSC
OFF.
▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or concealed.
Sensitivity of the warnings

The greater the sensitivity of the warning set‐
tings, the more warnings will be displayed. As
a result, there may be an increased number of
incorrect warnings.
The detection zone in front of the vehicle con‐

sists of two parts:
Person warning with city
▷ Central zone, arrow 1, directly in front of
braking function the vehicle.
Principle ▷ Extended zone, arrow 2, at right and left.

The system can help to avoid accidents with There is a risk of collision if persons are in the
pedestrians. central zone. A warning is only given of per‐
sons in the extended zone if they are moving in
the direction of the central zone.
sion with pedestrians in the urban speed area
and also contains a braking function.
117
Controls Security
Overview Warning with braking function
Button in the vehicle Note

Adapting speed and driving style
The warning does not release you from
your responsibility to adapt your speed and
driving style to prevailing driving conditions.◀
Display
If there is a risk of collision with a detected per‐
son, a warning symbol is shown in the instru‐
ment cluster and in the head-up display.
Intelligent Safety button
Red symbol is displayed and an acous‐
tic warning sounds.
Camera
Take action yourself immediately, by braking
or swerving.
Brake intervention
The warning requires that you have to brake
yourself. Maximum braking force is used dur‐
ing a warning. In order for braking force sup‐
port to be used, it is necessary for the brake to
be pressed sufficiently quickly and powerfully.
In addition, the system may also support with a
The camera is in the area of the base of the small amount of braking if there is the risk of a
rear-view mirror. collision. The vehicle can be braked at low
Keep the windscreen clean and clear in the speed until it comes to a stop.
area in front of the rear view mirror. Manual gearbox: When brakes are engaged
off.
Switching on/off
There will only be brake intervention if Dy‐
Automatic activation namic Stability Control, DSC is switched on
vated.
start of each journey.
Braking can be discontinued either by pressing
Switching off the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the
steering wheel.
Press button: the systems are
switched off again. LED turns off. Detection of objects can be restricted. Limita‐
tions of the detection range and functional re‐
Press button again: the systems are switched
stricitions are to be considered.
118
Security Controls
Tow-starting and towing ▷ During the calibration process of the cam‐

When tow-starting or towing, switch off era immediately after the vehicle is sup‐
the intelligent safety systems, otherwise an ac‐ plied.
cident may be caused by the malfunction of ▷ When there is sustained glare effect due to
the brake actuation function of individual sys‐ light opposite, for example the sun low in
tems.◀ the sky.
▷ In the dark.
System limits
Your own attentiveness
System limitations mean that it can occur
Lane departure warning
that warnings are not issued, are issued too
Principle
late, or are issued incorrectly. This means that
you must pay full attention so that you are able This system warns if the vehicle leaves the
to intervene actively at any time. Otherwise lane, when the vehicle is on roads with lane
there is the risk of an accident.◀ markings and travelling above a given speed.
Depending on country version, this speed is
between 55 km/h, approximately 35 mph and
Detection range 70 km/h, approximately 45 mph.
The detection capacity of the camera is limi‐
When switching on the system below this
ted.
speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐
This is why it can occur that no warnings are ment cluster.
When there are warnings, the steering wheel
It is possible that the following are not detec‐ starts to vibrate slightly. The timing of this
ted: warning may vary depending on the current
▷ Partially concealed pedestrians. driving situation.
▷ Pedestrians who are not detected as such The system does not issue a warning if the
because of the viewing angle or contour. driver indicates before leaving the driving lane.
▷ Pedestrians outside the detection range.
Information
▷ Pedestrians under a height of approxi‐
mately 80 cm, 32 in. Personal responsibility
Restrictions of the function sonal assessment of the road ahead and the
The function may be restricted or not available traffic situation.
in the following situations, for example: If a warning is issued, do not move the steering
▷ In thick fog, rain, spray or snowfall. wheel in an unnecessarily violent manner, as
otherwise you could lose control of the vehi‐
▷ On sharp bends.
cle.◀
▷ When deactivating vehicle stability control
systems, for example DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera and/or the
windscreen is dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine
using the start/stop button.
119
Controls Security
Overview ▷ Arrows: at least one lane boundary line has

been detected and warnings can be is‐
Button in the vehicle sued.
Output of the warning

If the vehicle leaves the driving lane and a lane
boundary line is detected, the steering wheel
starts to vibrate.
If the turn indicator is set before changing
lanes, no warning is issued.
Cancellation of the warning

Lane departure warning The warning is cancelled:
▷ Automatically after approximately
three seconds.
Camera
▷ On returning to the correct lane.
▷ With strong braking.
▷ On indicating.
System limits
▷ With missing, worn, poorly visible, merg‐
The camera is in the area of the base of the
ing/separating or ambiguous boundary
rear-view mirror.
lines, for example in areas where there are
Keep the windscreen clean and clear in the road works.
area in front of the rear view mirror.
▷ If boundary lines are covered by snow, ice,
dirt or water.
Switching on/off ▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads.
Press the button. ▷ If the boundary lines are not white.
▷ If boundary lines are obscured.
▷ On: LED is illuminated. ▷ If the vehicle is moving too close to the ve‐
▷ Off: LED turns off. hicle ahead.
The setting is stored for the currently used ▷ With bright light from oncoming traffic.
profile. ▷ When the windscreen in front of the inte‐
Display in the instrument cluster dirt, stickers, labels, etc.
▷ Lines: the system is activated. ▷ During the calibration process of the cam‐
era immediately after the vehicle is sup‐
plied.
120
Security Controls
Lane change warning Overview
Principle Button in the vehicle
Two radar sensors under the rear bumper Lane change warning
monitor the area behind and beside the vehicle
as of approximately 20 km/h, approximatively
12 mph. Radar sensors
In some equipment configurations, the radar
sensors are active from approximately
50 km/h, approximately 30 mph.
The system indicates when vehicles are in the
blind spot, arrow 1, or are approaching from
the rear on an adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The light in the exterior mirror housing illumi‐
nates at a dimmed level.
Before changing lanes with the turn indicator The radar sensors are located under the rear
switched on, the system issues a warning the bumper.
above situations.
The light in the exterior mirror housing flashes
Switching on/off
and the steering wheel vibrates.
Press the button.
Information
▷ On: LED is illuminated.
▷ Off: LED turns off.
sonal assessment of the traffic situation. The system can issue warnings as of approxi‐
mately 20 km/h, 12 mph.
the vehicle, otherwise an accident may occur, The setting is stored for the currently used
in spite of warnings.◀ profile.
121
Controls Security
Display Speed limit, adjustable

Light in the exterior mirror housing Principle
With the system, the speed can be restricted
from a value of 30 km/h/20 mph. There are no
restrictions below the set speed limit.
Exceeding the speed limit

In particular situations the speed limit can be
deliberately exceeded by accelerating strongly.
The system warns if the travelling speed ex‐
ceeds the set speed limit.
Information level
No brake intervention
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror housing
If the set speed limit has been reached or unin‐
indicates when vehicles are in the blind spot or
tentionally exceeded (for example driving
are approaching from the rear.
downhill) there is no brake intervention.
Warning If you set a speed limit whilst driving which is

below the current speed, the vehicle rolls until
If the turn indicator is set while a vehicle is in
the driving speed drops below the speed limit.
the critical area, the steering wheel vibrates
briefly and the light in the exterior mirror hous‐
Controls
ing flashes brightly.
The warning is terminated when indicating is Press the button Function
completed or the other vehicle has left the crit‐
ical area. System on/off
System limits Paddle:

The function can be restricted in the following Change speed limit, see
situations: page 123
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is
very much higher than that of your own
Switching on
speed.
Press the button.
▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads.
The current speed is assumed as the speed
▷ If the bumper is soiled, iced-over or a limit.
sticker is attached to it.
When switching on when stationary
When trailer towing, the system cannot be 30 km/h/20 mph is set as the speed limit.
switched on. A Check Control message is dis‐
The speedometer marker is set to the corre‐
played.
sponding speed.
A Check Control message is displayed in the
When activating the speed limit it is possible
event of limited functionality.
that Dynamic Stability Control, DSC is activa‐
ted and the mode is changed to COMFORT.
122
Security Controls
Switching off Warning

Press the button.
Visual warning
For example, the system is also deactivated: The indicator light in the instrument
cluster flashes if the set speed limit is
▷ When engaging reverse gear.
exceeded for as long as you exceed the
▷ When switching the engine off. set speed limit.
▷ When switching on Cruise Control.
▷ Activating some programs using the drive Acoustic warning
experience switch.
▷ If you unintentionally exceed the set speed
The indicators extinguish. limit, you will hear an acoustic warning af‐
ter approximately five seconds.
Change speed limit ▷ If the speed limit is reduced to below the
current speed while the vehicle is in mo‐
tion, the warning sounds after approxi‐
mately 30 seconds.
▷ If you intentionally exceed the speed limit
by fully depressing the accelerator pedal,
no warning is given.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Press the rocker switch repeatedly upwards or Marking of the speed limit
downwards until the desired speed limit is set. Display in the speedometer:
▷ Every time the rocker switch is pressed to ▷ Marker illuminates green:
the resistance point, the speed limit is in‐ the system is active.
creased or decreased by approximately
▷ Marker does not illuminate:
the system is inactive.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐
yond the resistance point, the speed limit
is increased or decreased to the next multi‐ Indicator light
ple of 10 km/h on the speedometer display.
▷ If indicator light is illuminated: the
If you set a speed limit whilst driving which is system is switched on.
below the current speed, the vehicle rolls until
▷ If indicator light is flashing: set
the driving speed drops below the speed limit.
speed limit is exceeded.
Exceeding the speed limit

You may intentionally exceed the speed limit. Brief status display
There is no acoustic warning in such a case. Set speed limit briefly appears.
To intentionally exceed the set speed limit,
completely depress the accelerator pedal.
If the speed drops below the set speed limit, it
is automatically reactivated.
123
Controls Security
Dynamic brake lights Note

Principle
The system is no substitute for the per‐
sonal assessment of your physical capacity
and may possibly not detect, or not in time, in‐
creasing inattentiveness or tiring. Therefore
ensure that the driver is well-rested and atten‐
tive, otherwise, risks can be detected too late
and an accident can be caused as a result.◀
Function
The system is switched on every time the en‐
▷ Normal braking: brake lights illuminate. gine is started and cannot be switched off.
▷ Severe braking: brake lights flash. After the start of the drive, the system is adap‐
Shortly before the vehicle comes to a stand‐ ted to the driver so that an increase in inatten‐
still, the hazard warning system is activated. tion or fatigue can be detected.
Deactivating the hazard warning system: This process considers the following criteria:
▷ Accelerating. ▷ Personal driving style, for example, steer‐
▷ Press the hazard warning system button. ing.
▷ Drive conditions, for example, time of day,
duration of drive.
The system is active from approxi‐
Active Protection
mately. 70 km/h, 43 mph and can display a rec‐
ommendation to take a break
General
The Active Protection safety package consists Recommendation to take a break
of systems independent of each other:
With increasing inattention or tiredness of the
▷ Attentiveness assistant. driver, an instruction is shown on the control
▷ PreCrash. display with the recommendation to take a
▷ PostCrash. break.
A recommendation to take a break will only be
Attentiveness assistant displayed once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, at the earliest another break rec‐
Principle ommendation may be displayed after approxi‐
The system can detect increasing inattentive‐ mately 45 minutes.
ness or tiring of the driver on long monotonous
drives, for example on motorways. In this situa‐ System limits
tion, it is recommended that you take a break. The function may be restricted in situations
such as the following and no warning or a
wrong one is triggered:
▷ If the time is wrongly set.
124
Security Controls
▷ If the speed driven falls considerably below ▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐
70 km/h, 43 mph. sioned.
▷ For sporty driving style, for example, with ▷ The windows are automatically closed.
heavy acceleration or fast cornering. ▷ The Glass Roof automatically closes.
▷ In active drive situations, for example, fre‐ ▷ With electrically adjustable seat backrest:
quent lane change. automatic positioning of the backrest of
▷ With bad road conditions. the front passenger seat.
▷ With high side-wind. After a critical driving situation without acci‐
dent, the front belts are released again. All
PreCrash other systems can be put back into the desired
setting.
Principle If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
With the system from 30 km/h/20 mph critical cally, stop the vehicle and open the seat belt
driving situations may occur, which could using the red button in the lock section. Fasten
cause an accident. In these situations, auto‐ the seat belt again before continuing your jour‐
matically preventative, protective measures ney.
are taken to minimise the risk of accident.
Critical driving situations are, for example: PostCrash
▷ Full braking. The system can automatically bring the vehicle
to a standstill in certain accident situations
▷ Heavy understeering.
without the involvement of the driver. The risk
▷ Heavy oversteering. of a further collision and its consequences can
When collision warning or front-end collision thereby be reduced.
warning with braking function is fitted, within By depressing the brake pedal, the vehicle can
the limits of the system, threatened collisions be decelerated much faster. The automatic
into vehicles in front or stationary vehicles are braking is interrupted as a result. By pressing
detected. the accelerator pedal, automatic braking is also
interrupted.
Note After reaching a standstill, the brake is auto‐
Personal responsibility matically triggered. Then secure the vehicle
The system is possibly no substitute for against rolling away.
your personal assessment of the traffic situa‐
tion. The system may not always reliably de‐
tect critical situations in time. Adjust the speed
to the traffic situation and pay attention when
driving, otherwise there is a safety risk.◀
Function
After fastening the belt, the front belts are au‐
tomatically pretensioned once when driving
away.
In driving critical situations, the following indi‐
vidual functions become active as required:
125
Controls Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle equipment or vehicle slip over the front wheels. DSC re‐
duces engine output and applies the brakes at
This chapter describes all standard, national individual wheels, helping, within the limits im‐
and special equipment provided in the model posed by the laws of physics, to keep the vehi‐
series. Equipment not available in a vehicle is cle safely on course.
lected special equipment or national version. Note
and systems. Adapting driving style to the prevailing
conditions
It is therefore the driver’s responsibility to
Anti-lock Brake System, adopt a suitable driving style in every situation.
ABS Not even DSC can overcome the laws of phys‐
ics.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when
Do not limit the additional safety afforded by
the brakes are applied.
this system by taking driving risks.◀
Steering control is retained even in the event
of full braking, enhancing active road safety. Do not deactivate DSC when driving with
ABS is ready to operate each time the engine a roof load
is started. Do not deactivate the Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol DSC when driving with a roof load, for ex‐
ample roof rack.
Brake assist Otherwise, safe driving may no longer be guar‐
When brake is pressed quickly, this system au‐ anteed in critical situations due to the in‐
tomatically applies maximum braking power creased height of the centre of gravity.◀
assistance. With full braking, this keeps the
braking distance as short as possible. It also Overview
makes full use of the advantages offered by
ABS. Button in the vehicle
Maintain pressure on the brake during the en‐
tire brake application.
Dynamic Stability Control,

DSC
Principle
DSC prevents the driven wheels losing traction
when you pull away from rest or accelerate. DSC OFF button
DSC is also able to detect unstable driving
conditions such as loss of traction at the rear
126
Driving stability control systems Controls
Indicator and warning lights In particular road conditions, for example roads
on which snow has not been cleared or uncon‐
If indicator light is flashing: DSC is reg‐
solidated ground, system ensures maximum
ulating the acceleration and braking
forward momentum but limited driving stabil‐
forces.
ity.
If indicator light is illuminated: DSC has failed.
Maximum traction is available when Dynamic
Traction Control DTC is activated. Driving sta‐
Deactivate DSC: DSC OFF bility is limited on accelerating and cornering.
Driving stability during acceleration and cor‐ Therefore, drive with the appropriate caution.
nering is restricted if DSC is deactivated. In the following exceptional situations it may
To support the driving stability, activate DSC be best to activate DTC for a short time:
as soon as possible. ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
Deactivating DSC
▷ If the vehicle has to be rocked out of or
Press and hold down the button – but started in deep snow or on a loose surface.
for no longer than approximately
▷ Driving with snow chains.
10 seconds – until the DSC OFF indicator light
in the instrument cluster is illuminated and
Deactivating/activating Dynamic
DSC OFF is displayed.
Traction Control, DTC
The DSC system is switched off.
Steering and, depending on equipment, chas‐ Activating DTC
sis are tuned for dynamic driving. Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
Activating DSC ment cluster and the DSC OFF indicator light
Press the button. is illuminated.
The DSC OFF and DSC OFF indicator
lights are not illuminated. Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
Indicator and warning lights TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster tor light no longer illuminate.
when DSC is deactivated.
If indicator light is illuminated: DSC is
deactivated. xDrive
xDrive is the four-wheel drive system available
in your vehicle. The combination of xDrive and
Dynamic Traction Control, DSC further optimises traction and driving dy‐
DTC namics. The xDrive four-wheel drive system
distributes the acceleration forces variably to
Principle the front and rear axles based on the driving
situation and the condition of the road.
The DTC system is a variant of the DSC opti‐
mised for forward momentum.
127
Dynamic Damper Control Drive experience switch

Principle Principle
The system reduces unwanted vehicle move‐ With the drive experience switch, certain prop‐
ments when a dynamic driving style is used or erties of the vehicle can be adjusted. Various
on uneven roads. programs can be selected for this. Using the
Depending on the condition of the road and drive experience button and using the DSC
the driving style, this enhances driving dynam‐ OFF button, one program can be activated in
ics and driving comfort. each case.
Programs Overview
The system provides different programs.
The progams can be selected via the Drive ex‐
perience, see page 128.
SPORT
Resolute sports regulation of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater agility when driving.
SPORT+
Resolute sports regulation of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater agility when driving, with re‐
stricted driving stability. Operation of the programs
COMFORT/ECO PRO Press the button Program

Balanced vehicle control.
DSC OFF
TRACTION
Variable sports steering SPORT+
The variable sports steering amplifies the SPORT
steering angle of the front wheels when the COMFORT
steering wheel is fully turned, for example in
ECO PRO
tight bends or when parking. The steering be‐
comes more direct.
It also varies the force required when steering, Automatic program change
depending on the speed. In the following situations, there may be an au‐
This enables a sports-oriented steering re‐ tomatic switch to COMFORT:
sponse. In addition, steering is made easier ▷ Failure of the Dynamic Damper Control.
during parking and manoeuvring. ▷ Failure of the Dynamic Stability Control
DSC.
▷ In the event of a flat tyre.
128
▷ When switching on the adjustable speed SPORT

limit, see page 122. Depending on equipment, resolute sports con‐
▷ When activating Cruise Control in TRAC‐ figuration of the chassis, steering and engine
TION or DSC OFF mode. control for greater agility when driving, with
maximum driving stability.
DSC OFF The program can be configured individually.
When you select DSC OFF, see page 127, The configuration is stored for the currently
driving stability during acceleration and corner‐ used profile.
ing is restricted.
Activating SPORT
TRACTION Press button until SPORT is displayed
With TRACTION you have maximum traction in the instrument cluster.
on loose surfaces. Dynamic, see page 127,
Traction Control, DTC, is activated. Driving
stability is limited on accelerating and corner‐ Configuring SPORT
ing. If the display is activated on the Control Dis‐
play, see page 130, the SPORT drive mode
SPORT+ can be set individually.
Sporty driving with optimised chassis and ▷ Activating SPORT.
adapted engine control with restricted driving ▷ "Configure SPORT"
stability.
▷ Configure SPORT drive mode.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
Driver assumes part of the task of stabilising vated:
the vehicle.
1. "Settings"
Activating SPORT+ 2. "Driving mode"
Press the button repeatedly until 3. "Configure SPORT"
SPORT+ is displayed in the instru‐ 4. Configure drive mode.
ment cluster and the DSC OFF indicator light This configuration is called up when the
is illuminated. SPORT drive mode is activated.
Automatic program change COMFORT

When activating the cruise control, the SPORT For a balanced configuration with maximum
mode is automatically selected. driving stability.
Indicator and warning lights Activating COMFORT

SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. Press button until COMFORT is dis‐
If indicator light DSC OFF is illumina‐ played in the instrument cluster.
ted: Dynamic Traction Control is acti‐ In certain situations, there is an automatic
vated. switch into the COMFORT program, automatic
program change, see page 128.
129
ECO PRO Display on the Control Display

ECO PRO, see page 184, provides consistent Program changes can be displayed on the
fuel consumption-reducing adjustment for Control Display.
maximum range at maximum driving stability.
1. "Settings"
Comfort functions and the engine control are
2. "Driving mode"
adjusted.
3. "Driving mode info"
The program can be configured individually.
Activating ECO PRO

Drive-off assistant
Press the button until ECO PRO is
displayed in the instrument cluster. The system provides support when driving off
on upward inclines. It is not necessary to use
the parking brake for this.
Configuring ECO PRO
1. Hold the vehicle in place by pressing the
1. Activate ECO PRO.
foot brake.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
Make the desired settings. out delay.
The vehicle is held for approximately 2 sec‐
Configuring drive program
onds after the foot brake has been released.
Under configure drive mode, settings for the
The possible holding duration is 2 minutes,
following drive programs can be made:
given corresponding equipment.
▷ SPORT, see page 129.
Depending on the vehicle's load or when tow‐
▷ ECO PRO, see page 185 ing a trailer, the vehicle may roll backwards a
little.
Displays
Drive off immediately
Program selection After releasing the foot brake, move off
swiftly, as the drive-off assistant will no longer
On pushing the button, a list of
hold the vehicle after approximately 2 seconds
programs that can be selected is
and it will start to roll back.◀
displayed. Depending on equip‐
ment, the list in the instrument
cluster may differ from what is
displayed. Servotronic
Principle
Selected program
The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
The selected program is shown quired when steering, depending on the
in the instrument cluster. speed. At low speeds the steering force is
heavily supported, i. e. a slight force is needed
when steering With increasing speed the sup‐
port for the steering force is reduced.
130
In addition, steering force is adapted according

to drive program, giving a sporty/direct or com‐
fortable steering response.
131
Controls Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment General
Characteristics of Cruise Control may change
in certain areas depending on vehicle setting.
Information
lected special equipment or national version. Personal responsibility
This also applies to safety-relevant functions Not even an activated system releases
and systems. the driver from their personal responsibility for
driving, in particular for keeping in lane and ad‐
justing speed, distance and driving style to the
Active Cruise Control with traffic conditions.
Stop & Go function, ACC Due to technical limits of the system, it cannot
respond independently in a reasonable way in
Principle all traffic conditions.
This system can be used to select a desired Always pay attention to driving, the area
speed which the vehicle automatically main‐ around the vehicle and the traffic and intervene
tains when the road ahead of you is clear. actively as required, for example, by braking,
Notes steering or swerving, otherwise an accident
may occur.◀
You can vary the distance maintained by the
system between your vehicle and the vehicle in Unfavourable weather conditions
front.
In unfavourable weather or light condi‐
It is dependent on speed for safety reasons. tions, for example during rain, snow, slush, fog
To maintain distance, the system automatically or oncoming glare, detection of vehicles may
reduces speed, brakes slightly if necessary, deteriorate and there may be brief interrup‐
and accelerates again when the vehicle in front tions of already detected vehicles. Pay atten‐
of you starts to move more quickly. tion when driving and respond to the prevailing
If the vehicle ahead brakes to a standstill, and traffic conditions. Take action actively as nec‐
sets off again within a short time, the system essary, for example by braking, steering or
can comprehend this within the given frame‐ swerving, otherwise there is a risk of acci‐
work. Your own vehicle is braked and acceler‐ dent.◀
ated again automatically.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure it to
When vehicle ahead drives off again after some prevent it rolling away
time, briefly press accelerator pedal or press
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
corresponding button to reactivate system.
ning: apply the parking brake and ensure that
Vehicle is accelerated again automatically.
position P of the Steptronic transmission is en‐
As soon as the road in front of you is clear, the gaged. The vehicle could otherwise start to
vehicle accelerates to your desired speed. move.◀
This speed will also be maintained on downhill
slopes, but may be under-run on uphill slopes
if engine output is insufficient.
132
Driving comfort Controls
Overview Switching the Cruise Control on/off

and interrupting
Buttons on the steering wheel
Switching on
Press the Function
Press the button on the steering
button
wheel.
System on/off, interrupt, see
Indicator lights are illuminated in the instru‐
page 133
ment cluster and the speedometer marker is
Resume speed, see set to the current speed.
page 135 Cruise Control can be used.
Reduce distance, see
page 134 Switching off
Disabled or interrupted system
Increase distance, see
page 134 When the system is disabled or interrup‐
ted, intervene actively by braking, steering and
Paddle: manoeuvring the vehicle yourself, as otherwise
Hold, store change speed, there is a danger that accidents might occur.◀
see page 134
When switching off with the vehicle stationary,
press the brake at the same time.
The arrangement of buttons varies depending
Press the button.
on equipment or country version.
Radar sensor ▷ When activated: press twice.

There is a radar sensor in the bumper to detect ▷ When interrupted: press once.
vehicles travelling in front. The indicators extinguish. The saved desired
speed and distance are deleted.
Interrupting
When the system is activated, press
the button.
If you interrupt when the vehicle is stationary,

press the brake at the same time.
The system interrupts automatically in the
A sensor that is dirty or covered can restrict following situations:
the detection of vehicles. ▷ If the brake is applied.
▷ If the drive position D is disengaged.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Take
care when removing any layers of snow or ▷ If the Dynamic Traction Control, DTC is ac‐
ice from the sensor. tivated or DSC is disabled.
▷ Do not cover the field of view of the radar ▷ If DSC intervenes.
sensor.
133
▷ With the driver experience switch SPORT+ With the system switched on, the driven speed
activated. is maintained and saved as the desired speed.
▷ If the vehicle is stationary and the seat belt This is shown in the speedometer and briefly in
and driver's door are opened. the instrument cluster. Displays in the instru‐
▷ If the system does not detect any objects ment cluster, see page 135.
for a lengthy period of time, for example on When maintaining or saving the Cruise Con‐
infrequently driven roads without defined trol, the Dynamic Stability Control DSC will be
boundaries. switched on if required.
▷ If the detection zone of the radar is disrup‐
ted, for example, due to contamination of Changing speed
heavy rainfall. Press the rocker switch repeatedly upwards or
downwards until the desired speed is set.
Maintaining, saving, changing speed With the system active, the speed that is then
shown is set and will be achieved on a clear
Information road.
Adapting the desired speed ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed up
Adapt the desired speed to the traffic to the resistance point, the desired speed
conditions and always be prepared to apply is increased or decreased by approxi‐
brakes, as otherwise there is a danger that ac‐ mately 1 km/h, 1 mph.
cidents might occur.◀ ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐
yond the resistance point, the desired
Speed differences speed is increased or decreased to the
Large differences in speed to vehicles next multiple of 10 km/h on the speedome‐
travelling in front may not be compensated for, ter display.
for example, in the following situations: Hold the rocker switch in one position to re‐
▷ Quickly approaching a slowly moving vehi‐ peat the corresponding action.
cle.
▷ Another vehicle suddenly swerves out of Distance
its own lane.◀ Selecting the distance
Adapt the distance to traffic and weather
Maintaining speed, saving
conditions as otherwise there is the risk of an
accident. Observe the prescribed safety dis‐
tance.◀
Reducing distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
The selected distance, see page 135, is dis‐

played in the instrument cluster.
During the interruption, press the rocker
switch.
134
Increasing distance 3. Briefly depress accelerator pedal, press

RES button or rocker switch when vehicle
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
ahead of you drives off.
sired distance is set.
The selected distance, see page 135, is dis‐ Switching between Cruise Control
played in the instrument cluster. with/without distance control
Traffic moving ahead
Recalling the desired speed and
The Cruise Control does not react to traf‐
distance
fic travelling in front of you, but maintains the
stored speed. Bear this circumstance in mind
While the vehicle is in motion
and react accordingly, otherwise there is a
With the system switched on, press danger that accidents might occur.◀
the button.
Switching to Cruise Control:
The saved speed value is deleted and can no Press and hold the button or
longer be called up in the following instances:
▷ When the system is switched off.
Press and hold the button.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Switch back to Active Cruise Control, press
When the vehicle is at a standstill button again briefly.
The vehicle was braked to a complete stop by
the system: Displays in the instrument cluster
▷ Green marker in the speedometer:
Your own vehicle automatically accelerates Desired speed
as soon as the vehicle travels out of the ▷ Marker illuminates green:
range of the radar sensor. the system is active.
▷ Marker in the speedometer changes to or‐ ▷ Marker illuminates orange:
ange: no automatic driving away. the system is interrupted.
To accelerate automatically to desired ▷ Marker does not illuminate:
speed, briefly press accelerator pedal or the system is inactive.
press RES button.
Rolling bars in the distance display show that Brief status display
the vehicle has driven away in the detection
range of the radar sensor. Selected desired speed.
Your vehicle has been actively braked to a

standstill by pressing the brake and is now be‐ If the symbol appears in the display for Check
hind another vehicle: Control messages, it is possible that the condi‐
tions for operation may have not been met.
1. Press the button to call up a saved
desired speed. Vehicle distance
2. Release the brake. The selected distance to the vehicle ahead is
displayed.
135
Distance indicator The system was deactivated but will continue

to brake until you actively take over by de‐
Distance 1 pressing the brake or the accelerator pedal.
Vehicle symbol flashes red and an

Distance 2 acoustic signal sounds:
System indicates that you must brake
and/or manoeuvre the vehicle yourself.
Distance 3
Set after switching on the system.
Switching between Cruise Control
Corresponds to approximately half
with/without distance control
of the value in the speedometer dis‐
play, expressed in metres. Display in the instrument cluster:
Cruise Control without distance con‐
Distance 4
trol.
Active Cruise Control with distance

System interrupted or distance
control.
control briefly disabled because the
accelerator pedal is pressed al‐
though a vehicle is not detected. Displays on the Head-Up Display
Distance control briefly suppressed Some information from the system can also be
because the accelerator pedal is shown on Head-Up Display.
pressed while a vehicle is detected.
System limits
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
off. Speed range
ACC does not continue to accelerate. To The optimum area of use is on well-construc‐
continue to accelerate, activate ACC by ted roads.
briefly depressing the accelerator pedal, RES
Minimum speed that can be set is
button or paddle.
30 km/h/20 mph. The maximum speed which
can be set depends on the vehicle.
Indicator and warning lights The system can also be activated when the ve‐
Personal responsibility hicle is at a standstill.
Indicator and warning lights do not re‐ When you use the system, comply with the le‐
lease you from your responsibility to adapt gally prescribed maximum road speed.
your desired speed and driving style to prevail‐ After toggling the Cruise Control without dis‐
ing driving conditions.◀ tance control, even higher desired speeds can
be selected.
Vehicle symbol illuminates orange:
Preceding vehicle detected.
Vehicle symbol flashes orange:

The requirements for operation of the
system are no longer being met.
136
Detection range Vehicles pulling out
The detection capability of the system and au‐ A vehicle driving ahead of you is only detected
tomatic braking capacity are limited. when it is fully in your driving lane.
For example, two-wheeled vehicles in front
may possibly not be detected. Vehicles pulling out
If another vehicle suddenly pulls out in
Limited detection capability front of you, the system might not be able to
The limited detection capability of the re-establish the selected distance of its own
system means that you must pay full attention accord. The same applies when you are driving
so that you are able to intervene actively at any significantly faster than the vehicle in front of
time. Otherwise there is the risk of an acci‐ you, for example when you are rapidly ap‐
dent.◀ proaching a lorry. If a vehicle is clearly detected
in front of you, the system requires that you in‐
tervene by braking, and if necessary by taking
Deceleration evasive action. You must react accordingly,
The system does not decelerate your car when otherwise there is the risk of an accident.◀
a standing obstacle is in the same lane, for ex‐
ample a vehicle at a red light or at the end of a
Unexpected lane changes
traffic jam.
The system also does not respond in the case
of:
▷ Pedestrians or similar slow road users
▷ Red traffic lights
▷ Stationary objects
▷ Cross-traffic
▷ Oncoming traffic
No warnings If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly changes
Under certain circumstances, no warning lane to avoid a stationary vehicle, you must re‐
is issued on approaching a stationary or very act accordingly, as the system does not re‐
slow moving obstacle. You must react accord‐ spond to stationary vehicles.
ingly, otherwise there is the risk of an acci‐
dent.◀
137
Cornering ▷ When towing a heavy trailer.

In such cases, press accelerator pedal.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not correctly aligned, for example
following parking damage.
A check control message is displayed if the
system has failed.
If the desired speed is too high for cornering, it

will be reduced slightly in the corner. However, Cruise Control
the system does not detect corners in ad‐
vance. For this reason, moderate your speed Principle
when cornering.
System keeps to speed set using buttons on
Due to the system's limited detection range, steering wheel. On downhill gradients, the sys‐
tight bends may lead to vehicles ahead being tem will brake the vehicle if the braking action
detected only later or not at all. of the engine alone is insufficient.
General
Characteristics of Cruise Control may change
in certain areas depending on vehicle setting.
Information
Unfavourable conditions
Do not use the system if unfavourable
conditions do not permit driving at constant
When your car is approaching a bend, the an‐ speed, for example:
gle of the bend may cause the system to re‐ ▷ On stretches with many corners and
spond temporarily to vehicles in the other lane. bends.
A possible reduction in the vehicle's speed by
▷ In heavy traffic.
the system can be compensated for by briefly
accelerating. ▷ If the road is icy, if there is fog, snow, rain
or a loose road surface.
When the accelerator pedal is released again,
the system will resume control of the car’s Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle
speed. and cause an accident as a result.◀
Starting
Vehicle cannot drive off automatic in following
situations, for example:
▷ On steep uphill gradients.
▷ Before bumps in road.
138
Overview ▷ Depress the clutch for a few seconds or

leave in neutral.
Buttons on the steering wheel ▷ Too high a gear has been engaged for the
speed.
Press the button Function
▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.
System on/off, interrupt ▷ Dynamic Traction Control, DTC is activa‐
ted or DSC is disabled.
Resume speed ▷ DSC intervenes.
▷ With the driver experience switch SPORT+
Paddle: set, change or hold activated.
speed.
Maintaining, saving, changing speed
Controls
Information
Switching on Adapting the desired speed
Press the button on the steering Adapt the desired speed to the traffic
wheel. conditions and always be prepared to apply
brakes, as otherwise there is a danger that ac‐
The speedometer marker is set to the current cidents might occur.◀
speed.
Cruise Control can be used. Maintaining speed, saving
Switching off
Disabled or interrupted system
When the system is disabled or interrup‐
ted, intervene actively by braking and manoeu‐
vring the vehicle yourself, as otherwise there is
a danger that accidents might occur.◀
Press the button.

During the interruption, press the rocker
▷ When activated: press twice. switch.
▷ When interrupted: press once.
With the system switched on, the driven speed
The indicators extinguish. The saved desired
is maintained and saved as the desired speed.
speed is deleted.
This is shown, see page 140, in the speedom‐
Interrupting eter and briefly in the instrument cluster.
When maintaining or saving the Cruise Con‐
When the system is activated, press
trol, the Dynamic Stability Control DSC will be
the button.
switched on if required.
The system interrupts automatically if:
▷ The brake is applied.
139
Change speed Desired speed

Press the rocker switch repeatedly upwards or ▷ Marker illuminates green:
downwards until the desired speed is set. the system is active.
With the system active, the speed that is then ▷ Marker illuminates orange:
shown is set and will be achieved on a clear the system is interrupted.
road.
▷ Marker does not illuminate:
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed the system is inactive.
lightly up to the resistance point, the de‐
sired speed is increased or decreased by
approximately 1 km/h, 1 mph. Brief status display
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐ Selected desired speed.
yond the resistance point, the desired
speed is increased or decreased to the
next multiple of 10 km/h on the speedome‐ If the symbol appears in the display for Check
ter display. Control messages, it is possible that the condi‐
tions for operation may have not been met.
The maximum speed which can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
Displays on the Head-Up Display
▷ Pressing the rocker switch until the resist‐ Some information from the system can also be
ance point is reached and holding acceler‐ shown on Head-Up Display.
ates or slows down the vehicle without
pressing the accelerator pedal.
The speed is maintained after letting go of Park Distance Control, PDC
the rocker switch. Pressing beyond the re‐
sistance point results in greater vehicle ac‐ Principle
celeration.
PDC assists you with parking. Slowly ap‐
proaching an object in behind, or with front
Calling up the desired speed
PDC, in front of, your vehicle is signalled by
Press the button. means of:
▷ Audible warning signals.
The saved speed is regained and maintained.
▷ Visual display.
Displays in the instrument cluster General

Indicator light Ultrasonic sensors in each bumper measure
the distance.
Depending on the equipment the indi‐
The range is approximately 2 m, 6 ft depending
cator light in the instrument cluster
on obstacle and environment.
shows whether the system is switched
on. An acoustic warning is only issued:
▷ At the front sensors and at the two corner
sensors at the rear at approximately 60 cm,
24 in.
▷ At the central sensors at the rear at ap‐
prox. 1.5 m, 5 ft.
140
To ensure correct functionality: Switching on/off

▷ Do not cover sensors, for example, by
stickers, bicycle rack or similar. Automatic activation
▷ Keep sensors clean and free from ice. While the engine is running, engage selector
lever position R.
▷ Do not spray the sensors with high-pres‐
sure cleaners for an extended period of
Automatic switching off when moving
time and maintain a distance of at least
forwards
30 cm, 12 in.
The system switches off when a certain dis‐
Information tance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Not even an activated system releases With front PDC: switching on/off
the driver from their personal responsibility for manually
driving.
Press the button.
Due to technical limits of the system, it cannot
all traffic conditions. ▷ On: LED is illuminated.
Always pay attention to driving, the area ▷ Off: LED turns off.
around the vehicle and traffic and actively in‐
tervene as required, otherwise an accident Display
may occur.◀
Audible warning signals
Avoid driving fast with PDC active An intermittent sound indicates position of an
Avoid approaching an object at speed. object as the vehicle approaches it. For in‐
Avoid moving off at speed while PDC is not yet stance, if an object is identified to the rear left
active. of the vehicle, the warning signal sounds from
the rear left loudspeaker.
Due to physical conditions the system could
warn when it is too late.◀ The shorter the distance to an object be‐
comes, the shorter the intervals become.
Overview If the distance to a detected object is less than

approximately 25 cm, 10 in, a continuous tone
With front PDC: button in vehicle sounds.
With front PDC: if there are objects in front of
and behind the vehicle, an alternating continu‐
ous tone sounds.
The sound signal is switched off:
▷ Once the vehicle has moved more than ap‐
proximately 10 cm, 4 in away from an ob‐
ject.
▷ If selector lever position P is engaged with
a Steptronic transmission.
Park Distance Control, PDC
141
Volume control ▷ In certain weather conditions, for example,

The volume of the PDC signal can be set in the high humidity, rain, snowfall, extreme heat
same way as the sound and volume settings of or strong wind.
the radio. ▷ With trailer noses and hitches of other ve‐
The setting is stored for the currently used hicles.
profile. ▷ Thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects
Visual warning
▷ Higher, protruding objects, for example
When the vehicle is approaching an object it breaks of walls or loads.
will be shown on the control display. Objects
▷ Objects with corners and sharp edges.
that are further away from the car will appear
on the control display before an audible warn‐ ▷ Objects with fine surfaces or structures, for
ing signal is given. example fences.
A display is superimposed as soon as PDC is ▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
activated. Low objects already indicated, such as kerbs,
Recording range of sensors is shown in col‐ may enter the sensors' blind areas before or
ours green, yellow and red. after a continuous audible signal is given.
If the reversing camera image is displayed, it is
possible to change over to PDC:
False alarms
Under the following conditions, PDC can issue
"Rear view camera"
a warning although there is no obstacle in the
detection range:
System limits
▷ In heavy rain.
Towing a trailer ▷ If the sensors are very dirty or covered with
The rear sensors are unable to perform any ice.
meaningful measurements. They therefore do ▷ If the sensors are covered with snow.
not switch on. ▷ On rough road surfaces.
A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ On uneven ground, for example, speed
bumps.
Limits of the ultrasound measurement
▷ In large, rectangular buildings with smooth
Detection of objects might not be possible if walls, for example underground car parks.
the physical limits of the ultrasonic measuring
principle are exceeded, such as for instance at ▷ Due to dense exhaust gas.
the following times: ▷ If the cover of the trailer tow hitch is incor‐
▷ With small children and animals rectly seated.
▷ With persons with certain clothing, for ex‐ ▷ Due to other ultrasonic sources, for exam‐
ample, a coat ple sweeping machines, steam-jet cleaners
or neon lights.
▷ With external disruption to the ultrasound,
for example, by passing vehicles for loud The functional disruption is reported by an
machines alternating continuous tone between the
front and rear loudspeakers. As soon as
▷ If the sensors are dirty, iced-up, damaged the disruption by other ultrasound sources
or incorrectly adjusted.
142
is no longer present, the system is fully due to other road users or objects located out‐
functional again. side of the screen area of the rear-view cam‐
era, for example.◀
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. Overview
The recording area of the sensors is shown
hatched on the Control Display. Button in the vehicle
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure correct functionality:
▷ Keep sensors clean and free from ice.
▷ Do not attach any sticker to the sensors.
▷ Do not spray the sensors with high-pres‐
sure cleaners for an extended period of
time and maintain a distance of at least
30 cm, 12 in.
Rear-view camera
Surround view
Camera
Principle
Surround view contains various camera assis‐
tance systems, providing support when park‐
ing, manoeuvring and exits and junctions with
poor visibility.
▷ Rear-view camera, see page 143.
▷ Side view, see page 146.
▷ Top view, see page 147.
The lens of the camera is located in the handle

Rear-view camera strip of the tailgate. Dirt can impair the quality
of the picture.
Principle Clean the lens, see page 237.
The rear-view camera offers assistance when
reversing into a parking space or manoeuvring. Switching on/off
To achieve this, the area behind the vehicle is
displayed on the Control Display. Automatic activation
While the engine is running, engage selector
Notes
lever position R.
Also monitor the traffic situation The image from the rear-view camera is dis‐
Also monitor the traffic situation around played if the system was switched on using the
the vehicle by observing it directly. Otherwise, iDrive.
there is a danger that accidents might occur
143
Automatic switching off when moving The zoom to the trailer tow hitch is dis‐
forwards played.
tance or speed is exceeded. Driving lane lines
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually

Press the button.
▷ On: LED is illuminated.

▷ Off: LED turns off.
PDC is displayed on the Control Display.
▷ Driving lane lines can appear in the image
Switching the view via iDrive from the rear-view camera.
With activated PDC or Top View switched on: ▷ They help to estimate the required space
"Rear view camera" when parking and manoeuvring on a level
road surface.
The image from the rear-view camera is dis‐
played. ▷ They are dependent on the current steer‐
ing angle and are continuously adapted to
Display on the Control Display steering wheel movements.
Operating requirements Turning circle lines

▷ The rear-view camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is completely closed.
Activating assistance functions

A number of assistance functions can be ac‐
tive simultaneously.
The zoom function for towing a trailer can only
be activated individually.
▷ Parking aid lines.
▷ Turning circle lines can only appear in the
"Parking guidance lines"
image from the rear-view camera together
Driving lane and turning circle lines are dis‐ with driving lane lines.
played.
▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐
▷ Obstacle marking. sible turning circle on a level road surface.
"Obstacle marking" ▷ When the steering wheel is turned to a cer‐
Spatially shaped markings are displayed. tain extent, only a turning circle line is dis‐
▷ Trailer tow hitch played.
"Towbar zoom"
144
Obstacle marking Parking with the help of driving lane

and turning circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir‐
cle lines are on the limit of the parking
space.
Obstacle markings can appear in the image

from the rear-view camera.
Its colour incrementation corresponds to the
markings of PDC. It is easier to estimate the
distance to the displayed object. 2. Turn the steering wheel so that the driving
lane line covers the corresponding turning
circle line.
Zoom to trailer tow hitch
To facilitate connecting up a trailer, the picture
area around the trailer tow hitch can be
zoomed.
Display settings
Brightness
The distance between the trailer and the trailer With rear-view camera switched on:
tow hitch can be estimated with the aid of two
static circular segments. 1. Select the symbol.
A docking-on line dependent on the steering 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
angle helps to aim at the trailer with your trailer is reached and press the controller.
tow hitch.
The zoom function can be enabled when the
Contrast
camera is switched on. With rear-view camera switched on:
Displaying the trailer tow hitch via iDrive, see 1. Select the symbol.
page 144.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
145
System limits Overview
Detection of objects Button in the vehicle

Very low obstacles and higher, protruding ob‐
jects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also consider data from
the PDC.
Follow information in the PDC chapter, see
page 140.
The objects shown on the Control Display are
may be closer than they appear. The distance
to objects is not estimated on the display. Side View
Side View Cameras
Principle
Side View provides you with an advance view
of crossing traffic at blind entrances. Road
users hidden by obstacles at the side are only
detected very late from the driver's seat. In or‐
der to improve the view, two cameras in the
front area of the vehicle scan the area to the
side.
Two cameras integrated into the bumpers pro‐
Notes vide detection.
The camera pictures are shown simultane‐ Both lenses of the cameras are located at the
ously on the control display. side of the bumper.
Also monitor the traffic situation Dirt can impair the quality of the picture.
When coming out of blind entrances, Clean the lens, see page 237.
also monitor the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle by observing it directly. Otherwise road
users or objects outside the range of the Side
Switching on/off
View cameras, for example, could pose an ac‐
cident risk.◀
Press the button.

forwards
tance or speed is exceeded.
146
Switch the system back on if necessary. General

The two cameras in the exterior mirrors and
Display the rear-view camera are used to view the area
The area to the side is shown on the control around the car.
display. The range at the sides and rear is at least 2 m,
approx. 7 ft.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the
exterior mirror are detected early.
Notes
Also monitor the traffic situation
Also monitor the traffic situation around
the vehicle by observing it directly. Otherwise,
there is a danger that accidents might occur
Artificial lines on the lower screen edge show
due to other road users or objects located out‐
the position of the vehicle front.
side of the screen area of the cameras, for ex‐
ample.◀
Brightness
With Side View switched on: Overview
1. "Brightness"
Contrast
With Side View switched on:
1. "Contrast"
System limits Top View

The pick-up range of the cameras is a maxi‐
mum of 100 m, 330 ft.
Top View
Principle
Top View assists you with manoeuvring and
parking. To achieve this, the area around the
door and road is displayed on the control dis‐
play.
147
Cameras If there is a short distance to an object at the

front, a red bar in front of the vehicle is dis‐
played in the same way as for the PDC display.
The lenses of the Top View cameras are loca‐

ted in the base of the mirror housings. Dirt can
impair the quality of the picture. The display appears as soon as Top View is
Clean the lens, see page 237. activated.
If the reversing camera image is displayed, it is

Switching on/off possible to change over to Top View:
"Rear view camera"
Automatic activation
While the engine is running, engage selector Brightness
lever position R. With Top View switched on:
The images from Top View and PDC are dis‐
played if the system was switched on using the
iDrive. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
forwards Contrast
The system switches off when a certain dis‐ With Top View switched on:
tance or speed is exceeded. 1. Select the symbol.
Switch the system back on if necessary. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
Press the button. Displaying the turning circle and
driving lane line
▷ On: LED is illuminated. ▷ The static red turning circle line indicates
▷ Off: LED turns off. the space requirement to the side with full
steering angle.
Top View is shown.
▷ The variable green driving lane line helps to
Display estimate the actual space requirement to
the side.
Visual warning The lane line depends on the engaged
When the vehicle is approaching an object it gear and the current steering angle. The
will be shown on the Control Display. lane line is continuously adjusted by the
steering wheel movement.
148
"Parking guidance lines" Information

The turning circle and driving lane lines are Personal responsibility
displayed.
Not even an activated system releases
the driver from their personal responsibility for
System limits driving.
Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐
Due to technical limits of the system, it cannot
uations:
▷ With a door open. all traffic conditions.
▷ With the tailgate open. Always pay attention to driving, the area
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in. around the vehicle and traffic and actively in‐
▷ In poor light conditions. tervene as required, otherwise an accident
may occur.◀
In some of these situations a Check Control
message is displayed. If a parking space changes
The system does not take changes to a
parking space that has already been measured
Park assistant into account.
This means that you must pay full attention so
Principle
that you are able to intervene actively at any
time. Otherwise there is the risk of an acci‐
dent.◀
Transporting loads
The system does not take account of
loads projecting beyond the outline of the ve‐
hicle during the process of parking.
This means that you must pay full attention so
that you are able to intervene actively at any
The system supports you when parking in par‐ time. Otherwise there is the risk of an acci‐
allel to the road. dent.◀
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
Towing a trailer
on both sides of the vehicle.
Trailers or load carriers attached to the
The park assistant calculates the ideal parking
trailer tow hitch are not taken into account by
line and takes over steering during the process
the system. The park assist will possibly not be
of parking.
available. Do not use the park assist in con‐
When parking up, also follow the visual and au‐ junction with a trailer or load carrier, otherwise
dible information of the PDC, the park assist there is a risk of accidents.◀
and the reversing camera, and respond ac‐
cordingly. Curbs
The park assistant incorporates Park Distance Where applicable, the park assistant may
Control, PDC, see page 140. steer across curbs or up onto curbs.
149
Therefore, pay full attention so that you are Park assistant

able to intervene actively at any time. Other‐
wise there is the risk of damage to the wheels
and tyres or the rest of the vehicle.◀ Ultrasonic sensors
An engine stopped by the Auto Start Stop
function is automatically started by activating
the parking assistant.
Requirements
To measure parking spaces

▷ When the vehicle is moving forwards up to
approximately 35 km/h, 22 mph.
▷ Maximum distance to the row of parking Ultrasonic sensors to measure parking spaces
vehicles: 1.5 m, 5 ft. are located on side of vehicle.
To ensure correct functionality:
Suitable parking space ▷ Keep sensors clean and free from ice.
▷ Gap between two objects, each of which ▷ Do not spray the sensors with high-pres‐
are at least 1.5 m, approximately 5 ft long. sure cleaners for an extended period of
▷ Minimum length of gap between two ob‐ time and maintain a distance of at least
jects: own vehicle length plus approxi‐ 30 cm, 12 in.
mately 1.2 m, approximately 4 ft. ▷ Do not stick things onto the sensors.
▷ Minimum depth: approximately 1.5 m, 5 ft.
Switching on/off
For the process of parking
▷ Doors and tailgate closed. Switch on with the button
▷ Parking brake released. Press the button.
▷ You must indicate accordingly when park‐ LED is illuminated.
ing into parking spaces on the driver's side.
The current status of the parking space search
Overview is displayed on the control display.
Parking assist is automatically activated.
Switching on with reverse gear
Engage reverse gear.
The current status of the parking space search
is displayed on the control display.
To activate: "Park Assist"
Switching off
The system can be deactivated by:
150
▷ Press the button. Parking with the park assistant

Also monitor the traffic situation
▷ Switch the ignition off.
Loud noises on the outside or the inside
of the vehicle which could drown the warning
Display on the Control Display
sound of the park assistant or PDC.
System is activated/deactivated Please additionally monitor the traffic situation
around the vehicle to avoid accidents.◀
Symbol Meaning 1. Switch on the park assistant and activate, if
Grey: system not available. applicable.
White: system available but not ac‐ Status of the parking space search is dis‐
tivated. played on the Control Display.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
System is activated. play.
To achieve an optimum parking position,
Status of the system wait for the automatic steering process af‐
ter changing gear at standstill.
The end of the parking process is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
3. Straighten up the parking position, if appli‐
cable.
Cancelling manually
You can cancel the park assistant at any time:
▷ "Park Assist" Select the symbol on the
▷ Coloured symbols, see arrows, on the side
Control Display.
of the vehicle display. Parking assist is acti‐
vated and parking space search is active. ▷ Press the button.
▷ Suitable parking spaces are shown on the
Control Display on the edge of the carria‐
Cancelling automatically
geway next to the vehicle symbol. With ac‐
tive parking assistant, the suitable parking The system automatically cancels in the
spaces are highlighted in colour. following situations:
▷ Parking process active. ▷ When holding firmly onto the steering

Steering has been taken wheel or even if steering is done.
over. ▷ When selecting gear, which does not cor‐
respond to the information on the Control
Display.
▷ The parking space search is always active ▷ At speeds over approximately 10 km/h,
with slow straight forward driving, even 6 mph.
with deactivated system. With deactivated ▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfa‐
system, the displays on the Control Display ces.
are shown grey.
151
▷ Any obstacles difficult to get over, for ex‐ ▷ With small children and animals
ample kerbstones. ▷ With persons with certain clothing, for ex‐
▷ With obstacles that suddenly arise. ample, a coat
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC shows ▷ With external disruption to the ultrasound,
gaps are too small. for example, by passing vehicles for loud
▷ When a maximum number of parking at‐ machines
tempts or parking time is exceeded. ▷ If the sensors are dirty, iced-up, damaged
▷ If turn indicator is set opposite to desired or incorrectly adjusted.
parking side. ▷ In certain weather conditions, for example,
▷ When changing to other functions on the high humidity, rain, snowfall, extreme heat
Control Display. or strong wind.
A check control message is displayed. ▷ With trailer noses and hitches of other ve‐
hicles.
Continuing ▷ Thin or wedge-shaped objects.
You can continue a cancelled parking process, ▷ With moving objects
if applicable. ▷ Higher, protruding objects, for example
For this purpose, follow the instructions on the breaks of walls or loads.
Control Display. ▷ Objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ Objects with fine surfaces or structures, for
System limits
example fences.
No parking support ▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
The park assistant does not support in the Low objects already indicated, such as kerbs,
following situations: may enter the sensors' blind areas before or
after a continuous audible signal is given.
▷ On sharp bends.
In some cases, parking spaces may be detec‐
▷ When towing a trailer.
ted that are not suitable.
Restrictions of the function
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The park assistant has failed. Have the system
▷ When on uneven road surfaces, for exam‐
checked.
ple gravel roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep inclines.
▷ If leaves have collected or snow has drifted
or been piled up in the parking gap.
Limits of the ultrasound measurement

Detection of objects might not be possible if
the physical limits of the ultrasonic measuring
principle are exceeded, such as for instance at
the following times:
152
Climate Controls
Climate
Automatic air conditioning
1 Seat heating, left 52 6 Temperature

2 Air distribution 7 Seat heating, right 52
3 Heated rear window 8 Cooling function
4 Air flow 9 Recirculated-air mode
5 AUTO program 10 Interior-temperature sensor
Information continuously, otherwise the air quality in the

interior will steadily deteriorate.◀
Adequate ventilation
If you stay in the vehicle for a long time,
ensure there is adequate ventilation from the
outside and do not use recirculated-air mode
153
Controls Climate
Air conditioning functions in detail Temperature

Turn the wheel to select the de‐
Adjusting the air distribution manually sired temperature.
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
The automatic air conditioning sets this tem‐
perature as quickly as possible, using higher
▷ Window glass. cooling or heating power if necessary. The
▷ Upper body area temperature is then maintained.
▷ Windows, upper body area and footwell Avoid switching between different temperature
settings in rapid succession. The automatic air
▷ Footwell.
conditioning will not then have sufficient time
to establish the temperature selected.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Cooling function
Direct air distribution to windows, increase
The interior can only be cooled when the en‐
quantity of air and temperature then switch on
gine is running.
with cooling function as needed.
Press the button.
Heated rear window Air is cooled and dried, then reheated
Press the button. to suit the temperature setting.
The heated rear window is switched Depending on weather conditions, the wind‐
off automatically after a certain time. screen and side windows may mist over mo‐
mentarily when the engine is started.
Adjusting the air flow manually The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally in the AUTO program.
Pressing the button on the left or right
reduces or increases the air flow. When using the automatic air conditioning,
condensation water, see page 176, develops
The air flow of the air conditioning system is that exits underneath the vehicle.
reduced as necessary to save the battery.
Recirculated-air mode
AUTO program If the air outside the vehicle has an unpleasant
Press the button. odour or contains pollutants, the supply to the
The air flow, air distribution and tem‐ interior of the vehicle can be shut off. The air
perature are automatically regulated. inside the vehicle is then recirculated.
Press button repeatedly to call up an
Depending on the selected temperature and operating mode:
external influences, the air is directed towards
the windscreen, side windows, and upper ▷ LED off: ambient air is constantly entering
body, and into the footwell. the car.
The cooling function, see page 154, is ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the ambient
switched on automatically in the AUTO pro‐ air supply is permanently shut off.
gram.
154
Climate Controls
The recirculated-air mode automatically Switching on

switches off at low outside temperatures after Press any key, except
a given time, to avoid condensation.
▷ Heated rear window.
In the event of condensation, switch off the re‐
▷ Seat heating
circulated-air mode and increase the air flow if
necessary.
Microfilter
Adequate ventilation In outside and recirculated-air mode, the mi‐
If you stay in the vehicle for a long time, crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
ensure there is adequate ventilation from the This filter should be changed during mainte‐
outside and do not use recirculated-air mode nance on your vehicle, see page 212.
continuously, otherwise the air quality in the
Switching system on/off
Switching off
In the lowest setting, press the left of
the button.
Automatic air conditioning with extended functionality
1 Seat heating, left 52 3 AUTO program

2 Temperature, left 4 Display
155
Controls Climate
5 Maximum cooling effect 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity

6 Temperature, right 12 Air distribution, left
7 Seat heating, right 52 13 Heated rear window
8 Cooling function 14 Interior temperature sensor — never cover
9 AUC/recirculated-air mode 15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
10 Air distribution, right sation
Information The cooling function, see page 156, is

switched on automatically in the AUTO pro‐
Adequate ventilation
gram.
If you stay in the vehicle for a long time,
A condensation sensor also controls the pro‐
ensure there is adequate ventilation from the
gram so that condensation is avoided as much
outside and do not use recirculated-air mode
as possible.
continuously, otherwise the air quality in the
Intensity of AUTO program
When AUTO program is switched on, auto‐
Air conditioning functions in detail
matic control of the intensity can be changed.
Temperature Pressing the button on the left or right
reduces or increases intensity.
sired temperature. The selected intensity is shown on the display
for automatic air conditioning.
Maximum cooling effect

The automatic air conditioning sets this tem‐
Press the button.
perature as quickly as possible, using higher
cooling or heating power if necessary. The System is set to lowest temperature,
temperature is then maintained. optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
Avoid switching between different temperature The air flows from the outlets for the upper
settings in rapid succession. The automatic air body area. Therefore open the ventilation
conditioning will not then have sufficient time vents.
to establish the temperature selected.
The function is available through an outside
temperature of approximately 0 ℃/32 ℉ and
AUTO program
with the engine running.
Press the button. The air flow can be adapted when the program
The air flow, air distribution and tem‐ is active.
perature are automatically regulated.
Cooling function
Depending on the selected temperature, inten‐
The interior can only be cooled when the en‐
sity AUTO program and external influences,
gine is running.
the air is directed towards the windscreen, side
windows, upper body, and into the footwell. Press the button.
156
Climate Controls
Air is cooled and dried, then reheated to suit Adjusting the air distribution manually
the temperature setting.
Press button repeatedly to select a
Depending on weather conditions, the wind‐ program:
screen and side windows may mist over mo‐
▷ Upper body area.
mentarily when the engine is started.
▷ Upper body area and footwell.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally in the AUTO program. ▷ Footwell.
When using the automatic air conditioning, ▷ Windows and footwell: only on the driver's
condensation water, see page 176, develops side.
that exits underneath the vehicle. ▷ Windows, upper body area and footwell:
only on the driver's side.
Automatic air recirculation control, If there is condensation on the window, press
AUC/recirculated-air mode the AUTO button in order to use the conden‐
If the air outside the vehicle has an unpleasant sation sensor.
odour or contains pollutants, the supply to the
interior of the vehicle can be shut off. The air Adjusting the air flow manually
inside the vehicle is then recirculated. To be able to regulate the air flow manually,
Press button repeatedly to call up an first switch off the AUTO program.
operating mode: Pressing the button on the left or right
reduces or increases the air flow.
▷ LEDs off: ambient air is constantly entering
the car. The selected air flow is shown on the display
▷ Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor for automatic air conditioning.
detects pollutants in the outside air and In order to protect the battery the air flow rate
shuts it out automatically. of the automatic air conditioning is reduced, if
▷ Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode: necessary.
the ambient air supply is permanently shut
off. Heated rear window
The recirculated-air mode automatically Press the button.
switches off at low outside temperatures after
The heated rear window is switched
a given time, to avoid condensation.
off automatically after a certain time.
If there is condensation on the window, switch
off recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to use the condensation sensor. Ensure Defrosting windows and removing
that air can flow towards the windscreen. condensation
Adequate ventilation Press the button.
If you stay in the vehicle for a long time, This removes ice and condensation
ensure there is adequate ventilation from the quickly from the windscreen and the front side
outside and do not use recirculated-air mode windows.
continuously, otherwise the air quality in the To do this, point the side nozzles at the side
interior will steadily deteriorate.◀ windows if necessary.
157
Controls Climate
The air flow can be adapted when the program ▷ Knurled wheel for varying temperature in
is active. upper body area, arrow 3.
If there is condensation on the window, switch Towards blue: cooler
on the cooling function as well or press the Towards red: warmer.
AUTO button to use the condensation sensor.
Set interior temperature for driver and front
seat passenger is not changed.
Switching system on/off
Switching off Setting the ventilation

In the lowest setting, press the left of ▷ Ventilation for cooling:
the button. Adjust the outlets so that air is directed to‐
wards you, for example if the vehicle's inte‐
Switching on rior has become hot.
Press any key, except ▷ Draught-free ventilation:
▷ Heated rear window. Adjust the outlets so that the air flows past
you.
▷ Seat heating
Ventilation in rear passenger
Microfilter/activated charcoal filter compartment
In outside and recirculated-air mode, the mi‐
crofilter/activated carbon filter filters dust, pol‐
len and harmful gases from the air.
This filter should be changed during mainte‐
nance on your vehicle, see page 212.
Ventilation
Ventilation at front
▷ Knurled wheel to open and close the air
outlets continuously, arrow 1.
▷ Knurled wheel for varying the temperature,
arrow 2.
Towards blue: cooler
Towards red: warmer.
▷ Lever to change the direction in which air
flows, arrow 3.
▷ Lever to change the direction in which air

flows, arrow 1.
▷ Knurled wheels to open and close the air
outlets continuously, arrow 2.
158
Climate Controls
Independent ventilation The system switches on within the next

24 hours only. Afterwards, it must be reactiva‐
Principle ted.
The independent ventilation system ventilates
the passenger compartment and lowers its
temperature under some circumstances.
The system can be switched on and off at any
ambient temperature either directly or via two
preselected switch-on times. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Open the ventilation vents so the air can flow
out.
Switching on/off directly

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate aux. ventilation"
symbol on automatic air conditioning
flashes when system is switched on.
Preselecting the switch-on time

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Start time 1:" or "Start time 2:"
4. Set desired time.
Activating the switch-on time

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate start time 1" or "Activate start
time 2"
Symbol on the automatic air conditioning
system is illuminated when the switch-on time
is active.
Symbol on the automatic air conditioning
system flashes when the system has cut in.
159
Controls Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment Lighter
This chapter describes all standard, national Risk of sustaining burns

and special equipment provided in the model Hold the hot cigarette lighter only by its
series. Equipment not available in a vehicle is knob, otherwise you may suffer burns.
therefore also described, for example the se‐ When leaving the vehicle, always switch off the
lected special equipment or national version. ignition and remove the remote control so that,
This also applies to safety-relevant functions for instance, children cannot operate the ciga‐
and systems. rette lighter and burn themselves.◀
Reattach the cover after use

Sun visor Reattach the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects which fall into the
Glare protection lighter attachment or into the socket may
Fold the sun visor downwards or upwards. cause a short circuit.◀
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is situated in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. The mirror light switches on
when the cover is opened.
Ashtray/lighter
Ashtray
The cigarette lighter is located next to the ash‐
tray.
Opening
Press in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved when it pops back out.
Remove lid.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
160
Interior equipment Controls
Connecting electrical In front seat passenger compartment

appliances
Information
Do not connect chargers to 12 volt sock‐
ets in the vehicle
Do not connect battery chargers to the 12 volt
sockets installed in the vehicle in the factory,
otherwise increased current consumption in
the vehicle could damage the vehicle battery.◀
Socket is located under the glove box.
Reattach the cover after use
Reattach the lighter or socket cover after Rear centre console
use, otherwise objects which fall into the
lighter attachment or into the socket may
cause a short circuit.◀
Power sockets
General
Cigarette lighter socket can be used as a
socket for electrical devices when the engine
is running or the ignition is switched on. Remove the cover.
Note
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
Inside the boot
140 Watt at 12 Volt.
To avoid damage to the socket, do not insert
an incompatible plug.
Front centre console
Socket is on the left in the boot.
Lift the lid and remove the cover or lighter.
161
USB interface for data With telephone: overview

transfer
Principle
Connection for importing and exporting data
on a USB medium, for example:
▷ Personal Profile settings, see page 33.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Importing trips.
The USB interface is in the centre armrest.
Notes
When connecting, bear the following in mind:
▷ Do not insert the plug forcibly in the USB Boot
interface.
▷ Do not connect any devices such as fans Boot cover
or lights to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect up USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB audio interface for
charging external devices.
Without telephone: overview
Remove boot cover, arrow 1, and hang on the

brackets on both sides, arrow 2.
Hanging boot cover on both sides

Hang boot cover on both sides, other‐
wise it can be damaged.◀
The USB interface is in the glove box
Do not deposit any heavy objects
Do not deposit any heavy and hard ob‐
jects on the boot cover. Otherwise they could
endanger vehicle occupants when braking or
swerving, for instance.◀
Do not permit the boot cover to roll rap‐

idly closed
Do not permit the boot cover to roll rapidly
closed as this could result in damage.◀
162
Raising 2. Insert the left side of the boot cover and

push towards the left. Then insert the right
side.
For loading, the withdrawn boot cover can be

raised. To do this, push the front area of the
boot cover upwards.
Expanding the boot
Before closing the rear window or tailgate,
push the boot cover downwards until it clicks. General
The boot can be enlarged by folding down the
Removing rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is split 60–40.
With equipment with load-through system:
The rear seat backrests is separated in the ra‐
tio 40–20–40. Each side or the centre section
can be folded down separately.
Notes
Risk of trapping
Press the release button, arrow 1, and remove Before folding the rear seat backrests, al‐
boot cover towards the rear, arrow 2. ways check that there is nothing to obstruct
their movement. When the centre section in
particular is folded down, make sure that there
Inserting is no-one in its movement zone and that no-
Push in boot cover until this clicks into place one reaches into the movement zone of the
on both sides. rear seat backrests. Otherwise injury or dam‐
age might occur.◀
Stowing away
Ensure stability of child seat
If the boot cover is not needed, it can be
stowed away under the rear part of the boot When installing child restraint systems,
floor. make sure that the child seat makes firm con‐
tact with the seat backrest. To do this, adapt
1. Fold up the rear part of the boot floor. the backrest angle on all the seats in question
as far as possible and also adjust the height of
the head restraints or, if possible, remove
them. Make sure that all backrests are securely
locked. Otherwise, the stability of the child
163
seat is limited and there is an increased risk of Luggage net

injury due to unexpected movement of the
Do not permit the luggage net to roll rap‐
backrest.◀
idly closed
Correctly engaging the catch Do not permit the luggage net to roll rapidly
When swinging the panel back up, make closed otherwise there is a risk of injury and
sure that the catch engages properly. The red the luggage net could be damaged.◀
warning field on the seat then disappears. Oth‐
erwise, the transported load may be propelled Normal-sized boot
inside the vehicle when braking or swerving 1. Fold open rear covers on the roofliner.
and endanger the vehicle occupants.◀
2. Grip the loop and pull the luggage net out
Use the middle seat belt of its cartridge.
If the middle seat belt in the rear is used, 3. Insert the rods on both sides upwards into
the larger side of the backrest must be locked. the brackets on the roofliner and push for‐
Otherwise the seat belt will have no restraining wards. This is best done from the rear seat.
effect.◀
Folding down sides
When the luggage net is no longer needed it:

reverse the procedure.
Reach into the recess and pull forward.

Enlarged boot
1. Fold down the entire rear seat backrest.
Folding down centre section 2. Press the button, arrow 1, to disengage the
cartridge at both sides.
Reach into the recess and pull forward.

3. Remove the cartridge upwards from both
side brackets, arrow 2. Take care not to get
the cartridge jammed.
164
4. Push the cartridge home in the guides, ar‐

rows 1 at the rear of the backrests.
5. Fold open front covers on the roofliner.

6. Swiftly pull out luggage net and insert into
the brackets as with a normal-sized boot,
see page 164. If removal is blocked, push
luggage net back in and smoothly remove
again.
If the luggage net is no longer needed: hold

down button, arrow 1, and push back luggage
net, arrow 2.
Finally, push the cartridge upwards into both

side brackets, until it engages. The red warn‐
ing panels disappear.
165
Controls Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment ▷ Storage compartment in the centre con‐
sole in the back, see page 168.
Glove box
Front passenger's side
and systems.
Note
Close the glove box again immediately
Notes After using the glove box while the vehi‐
cle is in motion, close it without delay, so that it
No loose objects in the interior.
cannot cause injury in the event of an acci‐
Do not store any objects unsecured in dent.◀
the interior, otherwise they could endanger ve‐
hicle occupants when braking or swerving, for
Opening
instance.◀
No anti-slip matting on the instrument

panel.
Do not use any kind of anti-slip matting on the
instrument panel, otherwise it may be dam‐
aged by the materials of the matting.◀
Storage options
Pull the handle.
The following storage options are located in
The light in the glove box comes on.
the interior:
The net in the glove box is stowing the inlay for
▷ Glove box on the passenger side, see
the cupholder, see page 168.
page 166.
▷ Glove box on the driver's side, see
page 167. Closing
▷ Without smoker's package: front compart‐ Fold lid down.
ment, in front of cupholders, see
page 167. Locking
▷ Storage compartment in the front centre The glove box can be locked with an integrated
armrest, see page 167. key. This means it is not possible to access the
glove box.
▷ Pockets in the doors., see page 167
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
166
Storage compartments Controls
After the glove box has been locked, the re‐ Pockets in the doors
mote control without the integrated key can be
handed over, for example, at a hotel. Do not store any breakable objects
Do not store any breakable objects, for
Driver's side example, glass bottles, otherwise there is the
increased risk of injury in the event of an acci‐
Note dent.◀
Close the glove box again immediately
After using the glove box while the vehi‐
cle is in motion, close it without delay, so that it Centre armrest
cannot cause injury in the event of an acci‐
dent.◀ Front
There is a storage compartment in the centre
Opening armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Pull the handle.
Fold the centre armrest upwards.

Closing
Fold lid down.
Sliding
Centre armrest can be slid in the longitudinal
direction. It engages into the end positions.
Front compartment
Connection for external audio device
An external audio device, for ex‐
ample an MP3 player, can be
connected through the AUX-IN
port or the USB audio interface
in the centre armrest.
Lift lid to open.
167
Storage compartment in the Rear

rear In the centre armrest.
There is a storage compartment in the centre

console in the rear.
Cupholder
Information
Unbreakable containers and no hot bev‐
erages
Pull centre armrest forward with the loop.
Use light and unbreakable containers and do
To open: press the button.
not transport hot beverages. Otherwise there
is an increased risk of injury in the event of an To close: push both covers back in one after
accident.◀ the other.
Unsuitable containers Push covers back into position

Do not force unsuitable containers into Push covers back into position before
the cupholder. Otherwise damage may re‐ the centre armrest is folded up, otherwise the
sult.◀ cupholder may become damaged.◀
Front
Coat hooks
Keep a clear view
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver’s view.◀
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the
hooks as they could endanger the vehicle oc‐
cupants, for example in the case of braking or
evasive manoeuvres.◀
Fittings for front cupholders
With the fitting, the cupholders can be used as The clothes hooks are located on the grab
an extra compartment. To do this, put the fit‐ handles in the rear.
tings into the cupholder.
Only use fittings for small object, for exaple a
key or remote control.
Storage compartments in the
When not in use, stow the fittings in the net in
boot
the glove box. To do this, plug the fittings with
Net
the top upwards in the net. Observe the trape‐
zoidal shape of net and fitting. Smaller objects can be stowed in the nets on
the left and right side.
168
Hooks/bag holders
1 Bracket
In the boot there is a bag holder on every side. 2 Telescopic track
The bag holders can be loaded up to max. 3 Tensioning strap
4 kg, approximately 8.8 lb. 4 Attachment for tensioning strap
5 Attachment points for bracket
Only light and suitable objects
Only hang light shopping bags or suita‐
ble objects on the holders. Otherwise, these
Use bracket
can endanger vehicle occupants, for example if Push the bracket into the attachment point un‐
objects fly around in the case of braking and til it clicks into place.
evasive manoeuvres.
Only transport heavy luggage with suitable
Fastening load
means of securing in the boot.◀ There are the following options for fastening
the load:
Tensioning strap ▷ Between rear backrests and telescopic
track
There is a tensioning strap on the right-hand
trim panel for securing small objects. ▷ Between telescopic track and tensioning
strap
Lashing eyes in the boot Fastening load between telescopic track and
For securing the load, see page 177, four lash‐ tensioning strap:
ing eyes are in the boot. 1. Put the load onto the telescopic track.
Adaptive Fastening System 2. Press button 1 and guide the tensioning

strap around the load, arrow 2.
Overview
The Adaptive Fastening System is for subdi‐
viding the boot. It consists of two brackets with
telescopic rails and tensioning strip.
Do not fold rear backrests
Before using the Adaptive Fastening
System, fold up the rear backrests and hang
on the luggage net, otherwise the items stored
may slide into the interior of the vehicle in the
event of an accident.◀
169
3. Hook the tensioning strap in to the attach‐

ment.
4. Press button 1 to tighten the tensioning
strap.
The tensioning straps can also be hooked into
each other to fasten larger loads.
Remove brackets
Fold up boot floor, arrow.
Divide compartment
The compartment can be divided with a plug‐
gable divider.
Narrow storage compartment
Remove the bracket vertically from the attach‐

ment point.
Stowing Adaptive Fastening System

If the Adaptive Fastening System is not nee‐
ded, it can be stowed away under the rear part
of the boot floor. Also use tensioning straps for
fastening.
Fold up boot floor. The boot cover or the
Floor net Adaptive Fastening System, for example, can
be stowed in the storage compartment.
For securing the load, see page 177, and for
keeping small parts, the floor net can also be
used. Reversible base
The underside of the boot floor has a water
Storage compartment under the boot and dirt-repellent coating.
floor Fold the boot floor up, remove it and turn it
Maximum load over.
For the storage compartment under the
boot floor, do not exceed a maximum permit‐
ted load of 20 kg, approximately 44 lb, other‐
wise damage could occur.◀
170
171
Driving hints
The Driving hints chapter provides you with
information that you may require in particular
driving situations or operating modes.

Driving hints Driving precautions
Driving precautions
Vehicle equipment Tyres
New tyres do not achieve their full road
grip immediately, for production reasons.
series. Equipment not available in a vehicle is During the first 300 km, 200 miles, drive mod‐
therefore also described, for example the se‐ erately.
This also applies to safety-relevant functions Brake system
and systems. Brake pads and discs only achieve a favourable
wear and contact pattern after approximately
500 km, 300 miles. Drive moderately during
Running in this running-in period.
General Clutch
Moving parts need a certain time to achieve The clutch only begins to function optimally at
maximum operating efficiency as a unit. approximately 500 km, 300 miles. Engage the
The following information helps to achieve clutch gently during this running-in period.
maximum service life and efficiency of the ve‐
hicle. After fitting new parts
Do not use Launch Control, see page 78, when The same running-in procedures should be
running in. observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Engine, gearbox and differential
Please observe the valid speed limit in the re‐
spective country you are travelling in.
General driving information
Up to 2000 km, 1200 miles
Closing the rear window and tailgate
Do not exceed the maximum engine revs and
speed: Drive with the rear window and tailgate
closed
▷ With petrol engines, 4500 rpm and
160 km/h, approximately 100 mph. Drive only with the tailgate closed in the event
of an accident, or if you have to brake abruptly
▷ With diesel engines, 3500 rpm and
or swerve to avoid an obstruction. Otherwise
the vehicle occupants or other road users
In principle, avoid full load or kick-down. could be at risk or the vehicle could be dam‐
aged. There is also the danger of exhaust
From 2000 km, 1200 miles onwards fumes entering the interior of the vehicle.◀
Engine and road speeds can be gradually in‐
If there is no alternative to driving with the tail‐
creased.
gate open:
▷ Close all windows and the Glass Roof.
▷ Turn up the blower to a high output level.
174
Driving precautions Driving hints
▷ Maintain moderate speed. Mobile communication equipment

Mobile communication equipment
Hot exhaust system
You are advised not to use mobile radio
Hot exhaust system devices, for example, mobile telephones, in‐
High temperatures occur in the exhaust side the vehicle without a direct connection to
system. an external aerial. Mutual interference between
Never remove the heat shields fitted here, or the vehicle's electronics and such equipment
apply underseal to them. When driving, idling cannot be entirely ruled out. There is moreover
or parking, ensure that no highly inflammable no guarantee that the radiation generated
materials, e.g. hay, foliage, grass etc. comes when such devices are transmitting will be dis‐
into contact with the hot exhaust system. It sipated out of the vehicle's interior.◀
could ignite and cause a fire, with the risk of
severe injuries or damage. Aquaplaning
Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes; otherwise Aquaplaning
there is a risk of burns.◀
On wet or slushy roads, reduce your
speed in order to avoid aquaplaning.◀
Diesel particle filter
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
The diesel particle filter collects soot particles
form between the tyres and the road.
and burns them periodically at high tempera‐
tures. This situation, known as aquaplaning, means
that the tyre can actually lose contact com‐
When cleaning for a few minutes, the following
pletely with the road surface and the vehicle
may occur:
can neither be steered nor the brakes properly
▷ Engine temporarily runs a bit roughly. applied.
▷ Noise and slight development of smoke
from the exhaust shortly after shutting off Wading
the engine. Pay attention to the water depth and
▷ The usual power output development re‐ your speed
quires a slightly higher engine speed. Do not exceed the maximum water depth and
maximum speed, otherwise the engine, electri‐
Radio signals cal system and transmission could be dam‐
Warning aged.◀
Certain vehicle functions may be affec‐ Only if the water is calm and only up to a water
ted by interference from high-frequency radio depth of max. 25 cm, approximately 9.8 inches
signals. Such signals are output from a series and at this depth drive no faster than walking
of transmission systems, for example, from air speed up to 5 km/h, approximately 3 mph.
traffic beacons or relay stations for mobile tele‐
communications. Safe braking
We recommend you consult your Service cen‐ Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as standard.
tre should you experience any difficulties.◀
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations in which this is
necessary.
175
Driving hints Driving precautions
The vehicle can be steered. Any obstacles can Downhill gradients

be avoided with steering wheel movements
Avoid excessive braking
that are as calm as possible.
Avoid excessive loads on the brake. Even
A pulsing of the brake pedal and hydraulic reg‐
slight, continuous pressure on the brake pedal
ulating sounds indicate that ABS is regulating.
could cause overheating, brake pad wear or
In certain braking situations, the perforated even brake system failure.◀
brake disks can cause functional noise. How‐
ever, this has no effect on the efficiency and Do not drive with the transmission in
operational safety of the brakes. neutral
Never drive with the transmission in neutral or
Objects in the range of movement of with the engine switched off. Otherwise, the
the pedals braking action of the engine will either not be
No objects in the range of movement of present, or there will be no power assistance to
the pedals the brakes or steering.◀
Foot mats, carpets or other objects must not When driving on long or steep downhill
breach the range of movement of the pedals, stretches, use the gear in which the least brak‐
otherwise they could influence the function of ing is required. Otherwise the brake system
the pedals when driving and may cause an ac‐ can overheat and braking action is reduced.
cident. The braking effect can be additionally in‐
Do not place additional foot mats on top of ex‐ creased by manually shifting down, even into
isting floor mats or other similar objects. first gear, if applicable.
Only use foot mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and that can be fastened ac‐ Corrosion of the brake disc
cordingly. Corrosion of the brake discs and contamina‐
Ensure that floor mats are securely reattached tion of the brake pads increase with:
after having been removed, for example for ▷ Low mileage.
cleaning.◀ ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used.
Wet roads ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
In damp weather, if road grit has been spread Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
or there is heavy rain, apply the brakes lightly that must be exerted by the pads during brake
every few kilometres/miles. applications to clean the discs is not reached.
In doing so, do not obstruct other road users. Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
The resulting heat dries the brake discs and brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
pads. fect that generally cannot be corrected.
The braking force will be available immediately
if needed. Condensate when vehicle is parked
When using the automatic air conditioning,
condensation water develops that exits under‐
neath the vehicle.
Traces of water on the ground are normal.
176
Loads Driving hints
Loads
Vehicle equipment Loading
This chapter describes all standard, national ▷ Wrap protective material around sharp cor‐
and special equipment provided in the model ners and edges of the load.
series. Equipment not available in a vehicle is ▷ Heavy transported load: stow as far for‐
therefore also described, for example the se‐ ward and as low down as possible, ideally
lected special equipment or national version. directly behind the rear backrests.
▷ Very heavy transported load: with no pas‐
and systems.
sengers on the back seat, insert both outer
seat belts into the respective opposite
buckles.
Information
▷ Fully fold down the rear-seat backrest if
Overloading the vehicle the load is to be stowed accordingly.
So that the permitted load capacity of the ▷ Do not stack storage goods above the up‐
tyres is not exceeded, do not overload the ve‐ per edge of the backrests.
hicle. The tyres could then overheat and sus‐
▷ Use the luggage net, see page 164, to pro‐
tain internal damage. Under certain circum‐
tect the vehicle's occupants. Make sure
stances, sudden tyre pressure loss will be the
that objects cannot pass through the lug‐
consequence.◀
gage net.
Permitted total weight and permitted axle
loads
Do not exceed the permitted overall weight
Securing the load
and permitted axle loads, otherwise the opera‐
tional safety of the vehicle can no longer be
Lashing eyes in the boot
guaranteed and the permit regulations are not
met.◀
No fluids in the boot

Ensure that fluid leakage does not occur
in the boot. Otherwise the vehicle could be
damaged.◀
Heavy and hard objects

Heavy and hard objects must not be For securing the load four lashing eyes are in
stored unsecured in the interior, otherwise the boot.
these could endanger the vehicle occupants,
for example, when braking and swerving.◀
177
Driving hints Loads
Lashing eyes in the boot with rails Roof rack

Note
Fitting only possible with roof railing.
Roof racks are available as special equipment.
Fastening
Follow fitting instruction of the roof rack.
Loads
For securing the load, four moveable lashing
Make sure that there is sufficient space to
eyes are found in the boot.
raise and open the Glass Roof.
A loaded roof rack alters the vehicle's road be‐
haviour and steering response by shifting its
centre of gravity.
When loading and driving, bear the following in
mind:
▷ Do not exceed permitted roof and axle load
as well as the permitted gross weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load evenly.
▷ The roof load must not be spread over a
To reposition a lashing eye press the button,
large area.
arrow 1. Ensure that the lashing eyes mesh
into the new position. ▷ Place heavy items of luggage at the bot‐
tom.
The lashing eyes can be removed from the
rails at the recesses. ▷ Securely fasten roof rack, for example with
tensioning straps.
Securing transported loads ▷ Do not allow objects to protrude into the

swing range of the tailgate.
▷ Smaller and lighter parts: secure with ten‐
sioning straps of various kinds. ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation, braking or cornering.
▷ Relatively large and heavy objects: secure
with lashing straps.
Fasten tensioning straps of various kinds to
the lashing eyes in the boot.
Securing transported loads
Accommodate and secure the transpor‐
ted load as described above, otherwise it could
endanger the vehicle occupants, for example,
when braking and swerving.◀
178
Towing a trailer Driving hints
Towing a trailer
Vehicle equipment approved. Use only the genuine BMW towball
mount assembly.
BMW Group Australia does not recommend or
support the installation and use of a Weight
Distribution Hitch or Load Levelling Device on
any BMW Group vehicles. The use of such de‐
vices may affect the vehicle's warranty status.
and systems. We recommend you consult your Authorised
BMW Dealer for any further advice or clarifica‐
tion.
General
The permitted trailer loads, axle loads, trailer Before a journey
nose weights and gross vehicle weight rating
are specified in the technical data. Trailer nose weight
Information on possibilities to increase the If possible, the trailer should not have a trailer
load can be provided by any Service Centre. nose weight less than the minimum of 25 kg,
The vehicle is equipped with reinforced approximately 55 lb, and also try to use the
springs on the rear axle and, depending on the maximum trailer nose weight to the full extent.
type, with a more powerful cooling system. The weight of the trailer tow hitch and the nose
weight reduce the maximum load of the towing
vehicle. The nose weight increases the vehicle
For Australia/New Zealand: weight. The total permitted weight of the tow‐
note ing vehicle must not be exceeded.
Towing Loads
Australian standard AS 4177.1-2004 Caravan Distribute the load as evenly as possible over
and light trailer towing components – towbars the loadbed.
and towing brackets contains the following Stow the load as low as possible and as close
statement, which is hereby accepted by the as possible to the trailer axle. A low centre of
BMW Group Australia: FOR TOWING ONLY. trailer gravity makes the vehicle combination
The trailer tow hitch supplied with your BMW much more stable and safe to drive.
vehicle should only be used for towing and not
The permitted total weight of the trailer and
in connection with any kind of transport device
the permitted trailer load of the vehicle must
attached to the trailer tow hitch, i.e. bicycle
not be exceeded. The smaller value is the limit
carriers or similar.
which should be adhered to.
As all BMW Group towbar assemblies are de‐
signed, tested and approved as a single unit, Tyre pressures
the practice of modifying or replacing the
Check the vehicle's and the trailer's tyre pres‐
BMW supplied towball mount assembly is not
sures carefully.
179
Driving hints Towing a trailer
On the vehicle, the tyre inflation pressure, see Towing a trailer

page 198, for higher loads applies.
Please observe the valid speed limit in the re‐
For the trailer, the regulations of the manufac‐
spective country you are travelling in.
turer apply.
Information
Runflat indicator
Reinitialise the runflat indicator after a trailer Appropriate speed when towing a trailer
has been attached or detached or the inflation Keep to an appropriate speed when tow‐
pressure has been corrected. ing a trailer. Speeds in excess of approximately
80 km/h, 50 mph can be enough to produce a
Tyre Pressure Monitor swaying or fishtailing motion, depending on
Reinitialise the Tyre Pressure Monitor after a the design of the trailer and the load it is carry‐
trailer has been attached or detached or the in‐ ing.◀
flation pressure has been corrected.
Maximum speed when towing a trailer
Exterior mirrors If you are towing a trailer, increase tyre

inflation pressures by 0.2 bar all round and do
Two exterior mirrors which bring both rear cor‐
not exceed a top speed of 100 km/h / 60 mph,
ners of the trailer into your field of view are re‐
as the higher axle load could result in damage
quired by law. Mirrors of this kind can be ob‐
to the tyres if the vehicle is driven at higher
tained from your Service centre as optional
speeds. Note the maximum possible tyre pres‐
accessories.
sures stated on the tyres.◀
Power consumption
Counteracting snaking
Function of the rear lights
If the trailer begins to snake, the vehicle com‐
Before beginning your journey, check the bination can only be stabilised by braking hard
function of the rear lights of the trailer, as oth‐ immediately.
erwise this might endanger other road users.◀
Make sure that the necessary steering correc‐
The power output of the trailer's rear lights tions are carried out as cautiously as possible,
must not exceed the following values: taking other road users into consideration.
▷ Turn indicators: 42 Watts per side.
Uphill gradients
▷ Tail lights: 50 Watts per side.
In the interest of safety and to avoid holding up
▷ Brake lights: 84 Watts total.
other traffic, do not attempt to climb gradients
▷ Rear fog lights: 42 Watts total. steeper than 12 % when towing a trailer.
▷ Reversing lights: 42 Watts total. If higher trailer loads are permitted later, the
Keep the switch-on times of the current con‐ limit is 8 %.
sumer units in the vehicleavan mode short in
order not to place an excessive load on the ve‐ Driving off on upward inclines
hicle battery. To prevent the vehicle from rolling back when
driving off, use the parking brake.
180
Towing a trailer Driving hints
Downhill gradients ▷ The system is not operational if Dynamic

On downward inclines, a vehicle combination Stability Control DSC is deactivated or has
has tendency to snake at an earlier stage. failed.
Before the downward incline, shift down man‐

ually to the next-lowest gear and drive down‐
wards slowly. Not for Australia/New
Zealand: Trailer tow hitch
High loads and high outside with electrically swivellable
temperature ball head
Long journeys with a high load and out‐
side temperature General
On long journeys with a high trailer load and The swivel-mounted ball head for the trailer
high outside temperature, make sure that the tow hitch is located on the underside of the ve‐
fuel tank is more than 1/4 full, as otherwise the hicle.
engine output can decrease or engine damage The LED illuminates green if the system is op‐
can occur.◀ erational.
Trailer Stability Control

Principle
The system helps you to neutralise a trailer's
tendency to swing from side to side.
It detects snaking movements and promptly
brakes the vehicle so that road speeds fall to
below the critical range and the vehicle combi‐ The button for swinging the swivel-mounted
nation is stabilised. ball head in and out is behind the left side trim
If the power socket for the trailer is in use but in the boot.
no trailer is attached, for example during use of
a bicycle carrier with lights, the system may Swivelling out the ball head
become active in extreme driving situations.
1. Open the boot.
Operating requirements 2. Step out of the swivelling area of the ball

head behind the vehicle.
The system is operational when towing a trailer
and when using the trailer socket as of approx‐
3. Press the button in the boot.
imately 65 km/h, 40 mph.
The ball head swivels outwards. The LED
System limits in the button flashes in green.
▷ The system cannot intervene if the trailer 4. Wait until the ball head has reached the
veers instantly, for example on slippery or end position.
loose road surfaces.
▷ Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip
over before a swinging motion is detected.
181
Driving hints Towing a trailer
Checking the interlock Trailer socket

Before driving with a trailer or load car‐
rier, make sure that the ball head is properly
locked, as unstable driving conditions and/or
accidents can otherwise result.
If the ball head is not properly locked, the LED
in the button illuminates in red.◀
Swivelling in the ball head

1. Uncouple the trailer or load carrier, remove
the fittings for the track-stabilising devices, The trailer socket is located on the trailer tow
pull out the connector for the trailer's hitch.
power supply and, if applicable, pull the Fold the cover downwards.
adapter out of the socket.
Eye for securing cable
2. Press the button in the boot.
The ball head swivels inwards. The LED in
the button flashes in green.
3. Wait until the ball head has reached the
end position.
Automatic interrupt of the swivel

movement
The swivel movement is interrupted automati‐
cally or is not performed if the current limit val‐
There is an eye on the trailer tow hitch for at‐
ues are exceeded, for example at very low tem‐
taching the trailer securing cable.
peratures or in the case of mechanical
resistance. For increased safety when towing a trailer, at‐
LED in the button illuminates in red: tach the trailer securing cable to the eye.
Press the button until the ball head has

reached the end position.
LED in the button illuminates in green:

Start engine using start/stop button.
Press the button in the boot.
The ball head swivels outwards. The LED
in the button flashes in green.
182
Saving fuel Driving hints
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment Closing windows and the
This chapter describes all standard, national glass roof
and special equipment provided in the model An opened glass roof or opened window in‐
series. Equipment not available in a vehicle is creases the drag coefficient and thus reduces
therefore also described, for example the se‐ the range.
and systems.
Tyres
General
General Tyres can have differing effects on fuel con‐
Your vehicle contains wide-ranging technolo‐ sumption. For example, fuel consumption can
gies for reducing consumption and emission be affected by tyre size.
levels.
Fuel consumption depends on various factors. Checking tyre pressures regularly
A number of measures, such as a moderate Check and, if necessary, correct tyre inflation
driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐ pressures at least twice a month and before
fluence fuel consumption and reduce burden setting off on a longer journey.
on environment. Insufficient tyre inflation pressure enlarges the
rolling resistance and thus increases fuel con‐
sumption and tyre wear.
Removing transported load
that is not required
Setting off immediately
Extra weight increases fuel consumption.
Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle at
a standstill; it is preferable to set off straight
away, driving at moderate engine speeds.
Removing add-on parts after
This brings the cold engine to operating tem‐
use
perature as quickly as possible.
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof racks and rear-
mounted racks after use.
Add-on parts on the vehicle interfere with its Driving with foresight
aerodynamic performance and inflate fuel con‐
Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily.
sumption.
Keep an appropriate distance from the preced‐
ing vehicle.
Anticipating the road situation and adopting a
smooth driving style will reduce fuel consump‐
tion.
183
Driving hints Saving fuel
Avoid high engine speeds maintenance or environmental factors, for ex‐

ample.
Basic principle: driving at low engine speeds
reduces fuel consumption and wear.
Use 1st gear to drive off. As from 2nd gear, ac‐ Switching off functions that
celerate quickly. Avoid high engine speeds and are not necessary at the
shift up quickly.
moment
Shift into the highest possible gear when you
have reached the desired speed and drive at a Functions such as seat heating or heated rear
constant speed with the lowest possible en‐ window require a great deal of energy and re‐
gine speed. duce the range, especially in city traffic and
stop/go traffic.
Pay attention to the shift point indicator in the
vehicle, if fitted, see page 88. Switch these functions off if they are not re‐
quired.
The ECO PRO drive program supports energy-
Using overrun mode saving use of comfort functions. These func‐
tions are automatically deactivated wholly or
When approaching a red traffic light, take your
partially.
foot off the accelerator and allow the vehicle to
roll.
On downward stretches, take your foot off the Having the vehicle serviced
accelerator and allow the vehicle to roll.
Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.
optimal economy and service life. Have main‐
tenance carried out by the Service Centre.
Switching off engine if Please also see the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, see page 212.
stopping for a relatively long
time
When you stop the vehicle for longer periods, ECO PRO
for example at traffic lights, railway crossings
or in traffic jams, switch off the engine. Principle
ECO PRO supports a low energy consumption
Auto Start Stop function driving style. To do this, the engine control and
The Auto Start Stop function of your vehicle comfort functions are adjusted, such as, for ex‐
shuts off the engine automatically during a ample, the air conditioning power.
stop. The engine is disconnected from the gearbox
If the engine is switched off and then started in selector lever position D under certain cir‐
again, the fuel consumption and emissions are cumstances. The vehicle rolls when idling to
reduced compared with a permanently running optimise fuel consumption. Selector lever po‐
engine. Savings can be made just by stopping sition D remains engaged.
the engine for a few seconds. In addition, situation-dependent information
Fuel consumption also depends on other fac‐ can be displayed which help you to drive with
tors, such as driving style, road condition, optimum fuel consumption.
184
In the instrument cluster, the extension of the Set ECO PRO speed.
range achieved as a result can be displayed as ▷ "ECO PRO limit":
a bonus range.
The power is reduced when the set ECO
PRO speed is reached.
Overview
The system comprises the following Coasting
EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
When rolling off, the engine can be operated at
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, see page 185. idle in a way that saves fuel by coasting, see
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instructions, see page 188.
page 186. The function is only available in ECO PRO
▷ ECO PRO air conditioning, see page 185. Mode.
▷ ECO PRO route-ahead assistant driving in‐
struction, see page 187. ECO PRO air conditioning
▷ ECO PRO coasting driving condition, see "ECO PRO climate control"
page 188. The air conditioning is adjusted for efficient
▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, see fuel consumption.
page 190. A slight deviation from the temperature set
such as a longer heating up and/or cooling
Activating ECO PRO down of the interior is therefore possible, in or‐
der to lower consumption.
Press the button until ECO PRO is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Mirror heating is available when the tempera‐
ture outside is low.
Configure ECO PRO ECO PRO potential

It is shown how much percentage of the possi‐
Via driver experience switch
ble saving potential can be achieved with the
1. Activate ECO PRO. current configuration.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
3. Configure the program. Display in the instrument cluster
Via iDrive ECO PRO bonus range

1. "Settings" An extension of range can be
2. "ECO PRO mode" achieved due to adjusted driving
style.
Or
This can be displayed as bonus
1. "Settings" range in the instrument cluster.
2. "Driving mode" The bonus range is contained in the display of
3. "Configure ECO PRO" the range.
Configure the program. After filling up, the bonus range is automati‐
cally reset.
ECO PRO tip
▷ "Tip at:":
185
Driving style ECO PRO tip, driving note
Display in the instrument cluster The arrow shows that the driving style
can be adjusted to be more efficient on
fuel consumption, for example, by
coming off the gas.
Note
The display of driving style and ECO PRO tips
in the instrument cluster are displayed if the
ECO PRO display is activated.
Activate display of driving style and ECO PRO
tips:
Display in the instrument cluster with extended
functionality 1. "Settings"
3. "ECO PRO information"
ECO PRO tip, symbols

An additional symbol and test instruction are
shown.
Symbol Measure
Come off the gas for efficient driv‐

ing style or decelerate carefully.
In the instrument cluster, a marking in the bar
display shows the current efficiency of the Reduce speed to the selected ECO
driving style. PRO speed.
Marking in area arrow 1: display of the energy
recuperation by rolling off or when braking. Steptronic transmission: shift from
Marking in area arrow 2: display when acceler‐ M/S to D.
ating.
Steptronic transmission / manual
The efficiency of the driving style is shown by
gearbox: follow gearshift recom‐
the colour of the bar:
mendation.
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long
as the marking moves in the blue area. Manual gearbox: engage idling for
engine stop.
▷ Grey display: adjust driving style, for exam‐
ple, by coming off the gas.
The display changes to blue as soon as all the
conditions for driving with optimised fuel con‐
sumption are met.
186
Display on the Control Display Route-ahead assistant
EfficientDynamics Principle
When travelling, information on consumption The system helps to save fuel and supports a
and technology is shown. precautionary driving style. Using the naviga‐
tion data, certain sections of the route ahead
can be recognised early and pointed out.
2. "EfficientDynamics"
The recognised sections of the route, such as
built-up areas or bends ahead, for example, re‐
Show fuel consumption history quire a reduction in speed.
The average fuel consumption can be shown
The instruction is also made if the section of
in the set time span.
the route ahead has cannot yet be detected
Vertical bars shows the fuel consumption for when driving.
the selected time span.
The instruction is shown until the section of
Interruptions in the trip are shown underneath the route is reached.
the bar on the time axis.
If there is an instruction, the speed can be re‐
"Consumption history" duced in way that saves fuel by coming off the
gas and coasting.
Setting time fuel consumption history
time span Operating requirements
Select the symbol. The system depends on how up-to-date the
navigation data are and their quality.
Reset fuel consumption history The navigation data can be updated.
1. Calling up "Options".
2. "Reset consumption history" Display
Show EfficientDynamics Info Display in the instrument cluster

The current type of action can be shown. The instruction on a section of the
"EfficientDynamics info" route ahead is given as an ECO PRO
trip for precautionary deceleration.
The following systems are shown:
▷ Auto Start Stop function. In the rev counter, a long arrow
▷ Energy recuperation. up to the zero point of the bar
▷ Air conditioning power. display shows that a section of
road in front has been detected.
▷ Coasting.
Show ECO PRO tips Display in the Head-Up Display

"ECO PRO tips"
The instruction for precaution can also
The setting is stored for the currently used be shown in the Head-Up Display.
profile.
187
Display on the Control Display ▷ Temporary and variable speed limits, such
as at roadworks.
▷ Quality of the navigation data is insuffi‐
cient.
▷ Cruise Control active.
▷ Trailer towing.
Coasting
Principle
In display on the Control Display is shown if The system helps to save fuel.
there is a corresponding section of the route.
To do this, the engine is automatically discon‐
An additional symbol in the split-screen of the nected from the gearbox in selector lever posi‐
Control Display shows the detected section of tion D under certain circumstances. The vehi‐
the route. cle continues to roll in idle to reduce
Symbol Section of the road in front consumption. Selector lever position D re‐
mains engaged.
Speed limit, for example, built-up
This vehicle condition is called coasting.
area.
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is
Junction or turn, exit from a fast depressed, the engine is automatically con‐
road. nected again.
Corner. Information
Coasting is a component of ECO PRO, see
page 184, drive mode.
Roundabout. By calling up the ECO PRO mode via the drive
experience switch coasting is automatically ac‐
tivated.
The function is available over a given speed
Using route ahead assistant
range.
A section of the route ahead is shown:
A precautionary driving style helps to use the
1. Come off the gas. function as often as possible and supports the
2. Until reaching the section of the route consumption-reducing effect of coasting.
shown, allow the vehicle to coast.
Safety function
3. Adjust the speed by braking as necessary.
The function is not available if one of the
System limits following conditions is met:
The system is not available in the following sit‐ ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
uations: ▷ Driving in the dynamic boundary range and
▷ Speed below 50 km/h, approximately on steep slopes.
30 mph.
188
▷ Battery charge state too low or too high Display in instrument cluster with
power requirement in the on-board net‐ extended functionality
work. The marking in the bar display
▷ Cruise Control activated. underneath the rev counter has
▷ Trailer towing. a blue background and is at
zero. The rev counter displays
Operating requirements information about the idle
speed.
The function is available in ECO PRO mode in
the speed range of approximately 50 km/h, ap‐ The coasting point display is illuminated at
proximately 30 mph to 160 km/h, approxi‐ zero when coasting.
mately 100 mph if the following conditions are
met: Display on the Control Display
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not In the EfficientDynamics Info the drive state
operated. coasting is shown when driving.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position D. The route covered in the coasting drive state is
shown by a counter.
▷ Engine and gearbox are at operating tem‐
perature.
Coasting vehicle condition can be influenced
using shift paddles.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
Coloration blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:

coasting drive state.
Show EfficientDynamics Info

3. "EfficientDynamics info"
The marking in the bar display has a blue back‐
ground and is at zero. The rev counter displays
Deactivating system manually
information about the idle speed.
The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
The coasting point display is illuminated at
ure ECO PRO, see page 185, menu, for exam‐
zero when coasting.
ple, to use the braking effect of the engine on
slopes.
profile.
189
ECO PRO driving style analysis The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are
Principle contained in the table and the faster the bonus
The system helps develop a particularly effi‐ range increases, arrow 2.
cient driving style and to save fuel. On the other hand, if driving style is inefficient,
To do this, the driving style is analysed. Evalu‐ a bumpier road and a reduced number of stars
ation is done in various categories and is is shown.
shown on the control display. To support an efficient driving style, ECO PRO
Using this display, the individual driving style tips are shown while the vehicle is in motion.
can be adjusted to save fuel. Tips on energy-saving driving style, saving
The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated. fuel, see page 183.
Due to an efficient driving style, the range of

the vehicle can be increased.
This gain in range is shown as a bonus range
on the instrument cluster and control display.
The function is available in ECO PRO Mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style

analysis
1. Activate ECO PRO.
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style ana‐

lyser consists of a symbolised route and a ta‐
ble of values.
The road symbolises the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
the more evenly the route is illustrated, ar‐
row 1.
190
191
Mobility
To assist you in preserving your car’s mobility,
this section contains important information on
operating fluids, wheels and tyres, maintenance
and breakdown assistance.

Mobility Refuelling
Refuelling
Vehicle equipment 2. Turn the fuel filler cap anticlockwise.

and systems.
Information 3. Place the tank cap in the holder on the fuel

Refuel in good time filler flap.
If the range drops below 50 km, 30 miles,

you should refuel as soon as possible, or en‐
gine function may be impaired and damage
may occur.◀
For diesel engines

The filler neck is designed for refuelling at die‐
sel pumps.
Closing
Fuel tank cap 1. Fit the tank cap and turn clockwise until it
is clearly heard to click into place.
Opening
2. Close fuel filler cap.
1. Briefly press rear edge of fuel filler flap.
Do not crush the retaining strap
Do not jam the retaining strap on the tank
cap, otherwise the tank cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapours can escape.◀
Unlocking fuel filler flap manually

For example, with an electrical fault.
The unlocking mechanism is in the boot.
194
Refuelling Mobility
1. Fold up boot floor.
2. Pull the green tag with the fuel pump sym‐

bol. Fuel filler flap is unlocked.
Note when refuelling

When refuelling, insert the filler nozzle fully into
the filler neck. Lifting the filler nozzle during re‐
fuelling results in:
▷ The fuel supply being cut off prematurely.
▷ Fuel vapour and fumes being fed back less
effectively.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle cuts
out for the first time.
Do not overfill fuel tank
Do not overfill fuel tank, otherwise dam‐
age may be caused to the environment and the
vehicle due to seepage of fuel.◀
Handling fuels
Comply with the safety regulations dis‐
played at filling stations.◀
195
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle equipment Do not refuel with fuel with a higher pro‐
portion of ethanol
Do not fill with fuel with a higher ethanol con‐
tent than recommended or fuels containing
methanol, for example M5 to M100, otherwise
the engine and the fuel supply system will be
damaged.◀
and systems. The engine has anti-knock control. This means
that different grades of petrol can be used.
Fuel quality Petrol grade

Super with RON 95.
Note
General fuel quality Minimum grade
Even fuels corresponding to the specifi‐ Unleaded petrol with RON 91.
cations may be of low quality. Engine problems Minimum grade
can arise, for example poor engine starting, im‐
Do not fill up with petrol below the mini‐
paired driving properties or reduced perform‐
mum grade indicated, otherwise the engine
ance. Use a different filling station or refuel
operation is not ensured.◀
with a higher octane fuel.◀
Diesel
Petrol
For optimal fuel economy, the petrol should be Incorrect refuelling
sulphur-free or as low in sulphur content as Do not refuel any rape seed methyl ester
possible. – RME –, green diesel or petrol.
Fuels labelled on the pump as containing metal After refuelling a wrong fuel, do not start the
must not be used. engine, otherwise there is danger of engine
damage.◀
Only refuel with unleaded petrol without
metallic additives Contact your Service Centre if the wrong type
Do not refuel with leaded petrol or petrol with of fuel has been added.
metallic additives, for example manganese or
iron, otherwise it may cause permanent dam‐ Diesel quality
age to the catalytic converter and other com‐ The engine is designed to run on diesel fuel to
ponents.◀ DIN EN 590.
You can fill up with fuels with a maximum pro‐

portion of ethanol of 10 %, in other words E10.
196
Fuel Mobility
Winter-grade diesel
No diesel additives
Do not use any additives, including pet‐
rol, as these could cause damage to the en‐
gine.◀
Winter-grade diesel must be used to ensure

reliable operation of the diesel engine during
the cold season.
It is sold at filling stations over that period.
Fuel filter heating is installed as standard
equipment to prevent the fuel from solidifying
during operation.
197
Mobility Wheels and tyres
Wheels and tyres

Vehicle equipment With runflat indicator: reinitialise the runflat in‐
dicator after adjusting tyre pressures.
With tyre pressure monitor: reset the tyre pres‐
sure monitor after adjusting the tyre pressure
to a new value.
Tyre inflation pressures
and systems.
Tyre pressures
Information for your safety
A tyre’s condition and pressure influence the
following:
▷ Operating life of the tyre.
The tyre inflation pressures specified for ap‐
▷ Driving safety. proved tyre sizes are located on the door pillar
▷ Driving comfort. of the driver's door.
If the speed letter of the tyre cannot be found,
Checking tyre pressures the tyre inflation pressure of the corresponding
Checking tyre pressures regularly size applies. The tyre inflation pressure data
Check tyre pressure regularly and adjust apply to tyres at ambient temperature.
as necessary, but at least twice a month and
before any long journey. Incorrect tyre pres‐ For Australia/New Zealand
sures can adversely affect the car's road hold‐
Warning
ing and cause tyre damage, which could result
in an accident.◀ The inflation pressures on the tyre label
are applicable only for tyres explicitly men‐
Tyres have a natural, uniform tyre pressure tioned on the label. Inflation pressures for tyres
loss. that may be covered by the label – by size,
Tyres heat up when driving and with the tem‐ speed category and load rating/load index –
perature of the tyre, the tyre filling pressure in‐ but not explicitly mentioned on the label may
creases. The tyre filling pressure data relate to be different. Please obtain adequate inflation
cold tyres or tyres at ambient temperature. pressures in accordance with the tyre manu‐
Only check the tyre pressure when the tyres facturer’s specifications at your tyre dealer.◀
are cold. In other words, after driving for a max‐
imum of 2 km or if the vehicle has been parked Tyre sizes
for at least 2 hours. Inflation pressures refer to the approved and
Inflating devices can display a pressure as recommended tyre sizes and tyre makes.
much as 0.1 bar too low.
198
Wheels and tyres Mobility
Your Service centre will be glad to provide Notes

more information on wheels and tyres. Vehicle behaviour that is an indication of tyre
damage or other faults:
▷ Unusual vibrations while the vehicle is in
Tyre tread motion.
Summer tyres ▷ Unusual vehicle response, such as pro‐

nounced pulling to the left or right.
The tyre tread depth should not be less than
3 mm, 0.12 in. Damage can be caused by, for example, run‐
ning over kerbs, road damage etc.
Below a tread depth of 3 mm, approximately
0.12 in, there is a high risk of aquaplaning. In the event of tyre damage
If there are indications of tyre damage,
Winter tyres reduce speed immediately and have the
The tyre tread depth should not be less than wheels and tyres checked without delay, oth‐
4 mm, approximately 0.16 in. erwise there is an increased risk of accident.
Below a tread depth of 4 mm, approximately Drive carefully to the nearest service centre.
0.16 in, suitability for vehicle operation in win‐ Allow vehicle to be towed or transported there,
ter is restricted. otherwise tyre damage can cause danger of
death to vehicle occupants and also other
Minimum tread depth road-users.◀
Repairing tyre damage

For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle advises against having damaged
run-flat tyres repaired; have them replaced in‐
stead. Otherwise subsequent damage cannot
be excluded.◀
Wear indicators are distributed across the tyre

Age of tyres
circumference and have the legally prescribed
Recommendation
minimum height of 1.6 mm, approximately
0.06 in. Irrespective of wear, change tyres after
six years at the latest.
They are identified on the tyre's side wall by
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. Date of manufacture
On the tyre side wall:
DOT …4314: the tyre was made in the
Tyre damage 43rd week of 2014.
General
Inspect tyres frequently for damage, the pres‐
ence of foreign bodies and wear.
199
Replacement of wheels and Recommended makes of tyre

tyres
Fitting
Information on tyre mounting
Only have tyres fitted, including balanc‐
ing, by your Service centre.
If such work is performed inexpertly, it could
result in consequential damage and thus con‐
stitute a safety risk.◀ Certain makes of tyre are recommended by the
manufacturer of your vehicle depending on
Wheel and tyre combination tyre size. These can be seen by the asterisk on
The correct wheel and tyre combination and the side wall of the tyre.
rim designs for the vehicle can be consulted at When properly used, these tyres meet the
the Service centre. highest standards in terms of safety and han‐
Incorrect wheel and tyre combinations will in‐ dling characteristics.
terfere with the proper functioning of various
systems, such as ABS and DSC. New tyres
To maintain good vehicle handling, always fit New tyres do not achieve their full road
tyres of the same make and tread pattern to all grip immediately, for production reasons.
wheels.
During the first 300 km, 200 miles, drive mod‐
After a tyre has been damaged, fit the original erately.
wheel and tyre combination again.
Approved wheels and tyres Retreaded tyres
Only use wheels and tyres that are ap‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
proved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for against the use of retreaded tyres.
the corresponding vehicle type otherwise, for Retreaded tyres
example because of tolerances in spite of the
Due to their potentially different internal
nominal size being the same, it is possible for
construction and advanced age, their durability
contact with the bodywork to occur, resulting
may be limited and their road safety therefore
in serious accidents
questionable.◀
The manufacturer of your vehicle is unable to
assess the suitability of tyres and wheels it has
not approved, and therefore cannot guarantee
Winter tyres
their safety.◀ For operation on wintry carriageways, winter
tyres are recommended.
Although so-called all-season tyres with an M
+S marking have better winter characteristics
than summer tyres, they do not normally
match the performance of winter tyres.
200
Top speed of winter tyres Run-flat tyres

If the car is capable of speeds higher than the
speed permitted for the winter tyres, a sticker Label
stating the maximum permitted speed for the
tyres fitted must be displayed in the driver's
field of view. Specialist tyre dealers and your
Service centre can supply the sticker.
Top speed for winter tyres
Do not exceed the top speed for the rele‐
vant winter tyres in use, otherwise tyre damage
potentially leading to an accident could oc‐
cur.◀
RSC marking on the tyre side wall.
Run-flat tyres These wheels consist of tyres that are self-
For your own safety, when using run-flat tyres, supporting within certain limitations, and spe‐
do not mix with other types of tyre. There is no cial rims.
spare wheel available in the event of a punc‐ The reinforced side wall means that the tyre
ture. Your Service Centre will be pleased to ad‐ keeps the vehicle mobile to a degree even if
vise. tyre pressure has been lost.
Interchanging front and rear wheels Observe the information on continuing to drive
with a flat tyre.
Different tread wear patterns arise on the
wheels of the front and rear axles, depending
Changing run-flat tyres
on the individual operating conditions. To ach‐
ieve even wear, it is possible to swap the For your own safety, use only run-flat tyres.
wheels over from one axle to the other. Your There is no spare wheel available in the event
Service Centre will be pleased to advise. After of a puncture. Your Service centre will be
changing, check the tyre pressure and adjust if pleased to advise.
necessary.
Such a change is not permitted on vehicles
with different tyre dimensions on the front and Remedying punctures
rear axles, in other words if mixed tyres are fit‐ Safety precautions in the event of a
ted. puncture
Park the vehicle on a solid surface and as far
Tyre storage away from moving traffic as possible.
Store wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and pref‐
Switch on hazard warning lights.
erably dark place when not in use.
Engage the steering wheel lock in the straight
Protect tyres against contamination from oil,
ahead position of the wheels.
grease and fuel.
Protect the vehicle against rolling, by applying
Do not exceed the maximum tyre pressure in‐
the parking brake.
dicated on the tyre's side wall.
Allow all occupants get out of the vehicle and
guide them out of the danger area, for example
behind the crash barrier.
201
Set up warning triangle an appropriate dis‐ Storage

tance away. Mobility system is located under boot floor.
Comply with relevant local laws.◀
Sealant container
Mobility system
Principle
With the mobility system, minor tyre damage
can be quickly sealed, to allow you to drive on.
To do that, liquid sealant is pumped into the
tyres which encloses the damage from the in‐
side when it hardens.
The compressor can be used to check the tyre ▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
inflation pressure. ▷ Filler hose, arrow 2.
Note the use-by date on the sealant container.
Information
▷ Please observe the information on the ap‐
plication of the Mobility system which are Compressor
on the compressor and the sealant con‐
tainer.
▷ Applying the Mobility system can be inef‐
fective for tyre damage as from a size of
approximately 4 mm.
▷ Contact a Service Centre if you are unable
to put the tyre back in operation.
▷ If possible, foreign matter that has penetra‐
ted the tyre should remain inside the tyre.
1 On/Off button
▷ Remove the speed limit sticker from the
sealant container and attach to the steer‐ 2 Mounting for cylinder
ing wheel. 3 Reduce tyre inflation pressure
▷ Using sealants can damage the TPM wheel 4 Tyre inflation pressure display
electronics. If sealant is used, check the 5 Compressor
electronics as soon as you get an opportu‐
6 Plug/cable for socket
nity and have them replaced if necessary.
7 Connecting hose — stored in the com‐
Enclosed spaces pressor floor
Never run the engine in enclosed spaces,
as inhaling the exhaust gas can lead to loss of
consciousness with fatal consequences. The
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, which
is colourless and odourless, but highly toxic.◀
202
Filling with sealing compound 4. Push the sealant container upright into the
1. Shake the sealant container. bracket on the compressor housing, until it
clicks.
2. Take the connecting hose entirely from the

compressor housing. Do not kink the hose. 5. Screw the connecting tube onto the tyre
valve of the faulty wheel.
3. Plug the connecting hose onto the con‐

nector of the sealant container until it 6. Insert the plug into a socket in the vehicle
clicks. while the compressor is switched off.
203
7. Switch on the compressor with the ignition 3. Pack empty sealant container and con‐
switched on or the engine running. necting hose to avoid soiling in the boot.
4. Store Mobility system in the vehicle again.
Spreading sealant compound

Immediately drive for approximately
10 km/5 mi to evenly distribute the sealing
compound in the tyre.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h/50 mph.
If possible, do not drive slower than
20 km/h/12 mph.
Switch off compressor after ten minutes
Do not operate the compressor for more Correcting the tyre inflation pressure
than ten minutes, otherwise the device will 1. Stop in a suitable area.
overheat and this could result in damage.◀ 2. Screw connecting hose onto the tyre valve.
Let the compressor run for approximately
three to 8 minutes to fill the sealing compound
and achieve a tyre inflation pressure of approx‐
imately 2.5 bar.
The tyre inflation pressure may rise to approxi‐
mately 5 bar during the filling process of the
sealing compound. Do not switch off the com‐
pressor during this step.
If it does not reach a tyre inflation pressure of
2 bar: 3. Plug the connecting hose directly into the
compressor.
1. Switch off compressor.
2. Remove the filler hose from the wheel.
3. Drive forwards and backwards by 10 m, ap‐
proximately 400 inches to distribute the
sealant in the tyre.
4. Re-inflate the tyre with the compressor.
Contact a Service Centre if the device does
not reach a tyre inflation pressure of 2 bar.
Storing Mobility system

1. Pull the connecting hose of the sealant
container off the wheel.
2. Pull the connecting hose off the sealant
container.
204
4. Insert a plug into the socket in the vehicle. ▷ 225/45 R 18.

Observe the snow chain manufacturer's infor‐
mation.
Ensure that the snow chains are always ade‐
quately taut. Re-tighten them if necessary in
accordance with the chain manufacturer's in‐
structions.
Do not initialise the runflat indicator with snow
chains fitted, as the instrument might other‐
wise issue an incorrect reading.
5. Correct tyre inflation pressure to 2.5 bar. Do not initialise the Tyre Pressure Monitor with
▷ Increase pressure: switch on the com‐ snow chains fitted, as the instrument might
pressor with the engine running or the otherwise issue an incorrect reading.
ignition switched on. When driving with snow chains, activate Dy‐
▷ Reduce pressure: press the button on namic Traction Control briefly if necessary.
the compressor.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Continuing with journey When snow chains are fitted, do not exceed
Do not exceed maximum permitted speed of 50 km/h, 30 mph.
Reinitialise runflat indicator.
Reinitialise Tyre Pressure Monitor.
Have the punctured tyre and the sealant con‐
tainer of the Mobility system replaced as soon
as possible.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested, found safe for use in traffic, and ap‐
proved by the manufacturer of your vehicle.
Information on approved snow chains can be
obtained from the Service centre.
Using
Snow chains may only be used in pairs on the
rear wheels with tyres of the following sizes:
▷ 205/60 R 16.
▷ 225/55 R 16.
▷ 225/50 R 17.
205
Mobility Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Important accessories in the engine compartment
1 Starting assistance, negative battery termi‐ 5 Engine compartment fuse box

nal 6 Oil filler neck
2 Vehicle identification number 7 Coolant tank
3 Reservoir for washer fluid In 6-cylinder and diesel engines, the cool‐
4 Starting assistance, positive battery termi‐ ant tank is located on the opposite side of
nal the engine compartment.
Bonnet If you are not aware of the regulations to fol‐

low, work on the vehicle should only be carried
Notes out by Service.
If such work is performed inexpertly, it could
Working in the engine compartment
result in consequential damage and thus con‐
Do not work on the car unless you pos‐ stitute a safety risk.◀
sess the necessary technical knowledge.
206
Engine compartment Mobility
Do not reach into the engine compart‐

ment
Do not reach into cavities or gaps in the engine
compartment; this represents a risk of injury,
for example due to rotating or hot parts.◀
Fold out wiper arms

Before opening the bonnet ensure that
the wiper arms are resting on the windscreen,
otherwise damage may occur.◀ Let the bonnet fall from approximately 40 cm,
16 in and then push down to fully lock the bon‐
Opening bonnet net.
1. Pull lever, arrow 1. The bonnet must audibly snap into place on
both sides.
Bonnet is released.
2. After releasing the lever, pull lever again,

arrow 2.
Bonnet is opened.
Indicator and warning lights

With the bonnet opened, a check control mes‐
sage is shown.
Closing bonnet
Bonnet open while the vehicle is in mo‐
tion
Should it appear while the vehicle is in motion
that the bonnet has not been properly locked,
stop immediately and close properly.◀
Risk of trapping
area of the bonnet is unobstructed during clos‐
ing.◀
207
Mobility Engine oil
Engine oil
Vehicle equipment If the engine oil level reaches the minimum, a
check control message is shown.
and special equipment provided in the model Requirements
A current measurement is available after ap‐
proximately 30 minutes of driving. With a
shorter trip, the status of the last sufficiently
long trip is shown.
and systems.
When frequently making short trips, regularly
take a detailed measurement.
General
Displaying engine oil level
The engine oil consumption depends on the On the Control Display:
driving style and operating conditions.
Engine oil consumption can be increased, for 1. "Vehicle information"
example by: 2. "Vehicle status"
▷ Sporty driving style. 3. "Engine oil level"
▷ Running in engine.
Messages for the engine oil level
▷ Engine idling.
Different messages are shown on the display,
▷ Use of unapproved engine oil grades. depending on the engine oil level. Follow these
Therefore check the engine oil level regularly messages.
after each time you fill up. If there is too little engine oil, within the next
Depending on the engine, the vehicle has an 200 km, approximately 120 miles top up en‐
electronic oil measurement system or an oil gine oil, see page 209.
measurement with a dipstick.
Too little engine oil
Electronic oil measurement has two measure‐
Immediately top up with engine oil, oth‐
ment principles:
erwise damage may be caused by too little en‐
▷ Status display. gine oil.◀
▷ Detailed measurement.
Ensure not to top up with too much engine oil.
Too much engine oil
Electronic oil measurement Have the vehicle examined immediately,
otherwise too much engine oil could result in
Status display engine damage.◀
Principle
The engine oil level is electronically monitored
when travelling and shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
208
Engine oil Mobility
Detailed measurement Oil filler neck
Principle
In the detailed measurement, the engine oil
level is checked and shown on a scale.
During the measurement, the idle speed is
slightly raised.
General
A detailed measurement is only possible with
certain engines. Only top up a maximum quantity of 1 litre, ap‐
proximately 2 pints of engine oil when the
Requirements message in the instrument cluster is shown.
▷ Vehicle is on an even road.
Adding engine oil
▷ Manual gearbox: gear lever in neutral posi‐
tion, clutch and accelerator pedal not de‐ Within the next 200 km, approximately
pressed. 120 miles top up engine oil otherwise engine
damage could be caused.◀
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in
selector lever position N or P and accelera‐ Do not top up with too much engine oil
tor pedal not depressed. With too much engine oil topped up, im‐
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise
perature. engine damage can be caused.◀
Carrying out a detailed measurement Protecting children

Carry out a detailed measurement of the en‐ Keep all oils, greases etc. out of the
gine oil level: reach of children, and read and comply with
any warning instructions on the containers, to
1. "Vehicle information" avoid any health risks.◀
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement" Engine oil types for topping
The engine oil level is checked and shown on a up
scale.
Duration: approximately 1 minute.
Information
No oil additives
Oil additives could lead to engine dam‐
Adding engine oil age.◀
General Viscosity classes with engine oils

Switch off the ignition and securely stop the When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
vehicle before topping up with engine oil. the engine oil has one of the viscosity classes
SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 or SAE
209
Mobility Engine oil
5W-30 otherwise functional disruptions or en‐

gine damage may occur.◀
The engine oil quality is decisive for the life or

the engine.
Several engine oil types are not available in all
countries.
Approved engine oil types

Engine oils with following specifications can be
topped up:
Petrol engine
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-04.
Diesel engine
BMW Longlife-04.
Further information on approved types of en‐

gine oil can be asked for at the Service Centre.
Alternative engine oil types

If approved engine oils are not available, up to
1 litre, approximately 2 pints of an engine oil
with the following specification can be topped
up:
Petrol engine
ACEA A3/B4.
Diesel engine
ACEA C3.
Oil change
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
having the engine oil changed at the Service
Centre.
210
Coolant Mobility
Coolant
Vehicle equipment The marks are on the side of the coolant
tank.
and special equipment provided in the model Symbol Meaning
therefore also described, for example the se‐ Maximum
Minimum
and systems.
Top up
1. Allow the engine to cool down.
Information 2. Turn the cap on the coolant tank slightly
Danger of scalding while the engine is anti-clockwise until it starts to open, then
hot allow the pressure to escape before open‐
ing it fully.
Do not open up the cooling system while the
engine is hot, otherwise you may scald your‐
self on the escaping coolant steam.◀
Suitable additives
Use only suitable additives, otherwise
the engine could incur damage. The additives
are injurious to health.◀
Coolant is a mixture of water and an additive.

Not all commercially available additives are
3. If necessary, slowly top up to the correct
suitable for the vehicle. Information on suitable
level; do not overfill.
additives can be obtained from the Service
Centre. 4. Fit the cap and turn until it is clearly heard
to click into place. The arrows on the cool‐
ant tank and the lid must be pointing to‐
wards each other.
Coolant level
5. Have the cause of coolant loss rectified as
General soon as possible.
Depending on the engine version, the coolant
tank is located on the right or left of the engine
compartment. Disposal
When disposing of coolant and coolant
Check additives, comply with the relevant en‐
1. Allow the engine to cool down. vironmental protection regulations.
2. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the Min. and Max. marks.
211
Mobility Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment Periods out of use
Immobilisation periods with the vehicle battery
disconnected are not taken into account.
series. Equipment not available in a vehicle is Updating the time-dependent maintenance
therefore also described, for example the se‐ scope such a brake fluid and any engine oil and
lected special equipment or national version. microfilter or activated carbon filter can be
This also applies to safety-relevant functions done by a Service Centre.
and systems.
Service history
BMW Maintenance System Have maintenance work vehicleried out by the
The maintenance system points out the nec‐ Service Centre and entered in the vehicle data.
essary maintenance measures and so sup‐ The entries are, just like a service booklet, evi‐
ports you in maintaining the road and opera‐ dence of regular maintenance.
tional safety of the vehicle. Maintenance entered is shown on the Control
Display, see page 88.
Condition Based Service,

CBS For Australia/New Zealand:
Sensors and advanced algorithms monitor the
maintenance
conditions in which your vehicle is used. Con‐ No maintenance work other than normal main‐
dition Based Service uses this information to tenance is required to keep the emission levels
calculate the maintenance requirements. of your vehicle within the design limits.
The system thus enables adaptation of the
scope of maintenance to the individual usage
profile. Overview: maintenance
Detailed information on service requirements, schedule
see page 87, can be displayed at the Control
Scopes and intervals may vary depending on
Display.
national version. Further information can be
obtained from the Service Centre.
Service data in the remote control
Information on maintenance requirements is Standard schedule
continually saved in the remote control. The
Service Centre reads out this data and then Maintenance work
suggests a set of maintenance routines opti‐
mised on this basis. Examine check control messages.
This is why you should hand over the remote Examine indicator and warning messages.
control that was last used for driving to your
service advisor with the vehicle. Parking brake: check function.
212
Maintenance Mobility
Engine oil Maintenance work
Maintenance work Parking brake: check function on a dyna‐

mometer test rig.
Replace engine oil and oil filter.
Reset service display in line with workshop
Automatic air conditioning: replace the mi‐ guidelines.
crofilter.
With a petrol engine: Brake fluid

With every second engine oil change.
Maintenance work
Replace spark plugs
Replace brake fluid.
With diesel engine:
With every second engine oil change. Reset service display in line with workshop
guidelines.
Replace the fuel filter, with lower fuel grades,
shorten the replacement interval.
Vehicle check
With every second engine oil change.
Intake noise damper: replace air-filter ele‐ Maintenance work
ment; with heavier dust deposit, reduce
change interval. Check horn, headlight flasher and hazard
warning system.
Reset service display in line with workshop
guidelines. Check instrument lighting and dial lighting
and heating fan.
Front brake Check lighting system.
Seat belt: check condition of the seat belt

Maintenance work
strap, function of roller mechanism, belt in‐
Replace brake pads, clean brake shafts. terlock and belt buckle.
Brake discs: check surface and thickness. Check windscreen wiper and washer system.
Reset service display in line with workshop Mobility system: check expiry date on the
guidelines. sealant container.
Tyres: check tread depth, running surface,

Rear brakes outer condition and filling pressure.
Maintenance work Initialise runflat indicator RPA.

Initialise Tyre Pressure Monitor TPM.
Replace brake pads, clean brake shafts.
Check the coolant level and concentration.
Brake discs: check surface and thickness.
Windscreen washer: check fluid level.
Brake hoses and connectors: check for leaks,

damage and correct position.
213
Mobility Maintenance
Maintenance work Position
Underbody, including all visible parts: check

for damage, corrosion, sealing including seal
of shock absorbers and check the fitting of
springs.
Steering components: check clearance, leak-

tightness and damage.
Check for road safety, test drive: braking,

steering, shock absorbers, gears.
The OBD socket for checking components de‐
Check warning triangle, warning jacket and finitive in terms of the composition of the ex‐
first-aid kit are present. Check expiry date on haust emissions is on the driver's side.
first-aid kit.
Reset service display in line with workshop Emissions

guidelines.
▷ The warning light flashes:
Engine malfunction that could
Separate calculation damage the catalytic converter.
Replacement work, spare parts, operating ma‐ Have the vehicle checked as soon
terials and wear material are calculated sepa‐ as possible.
rately. Further information can be obtained ▷ The warning light is illuminated:
from the Service centre.
Deterioration of exhaust emissions. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Socket for on-board
diagnosis, OBD
Recycling
Note The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
Socket for on-board diagnosis handing the vehicle in at a take-back point
The socket for on-board diagnosis must nominated by the manufacturer at the end of
only be used by authorised persons. These in‐ its life cycle. The regulations concerning the
clude the Service Centre or a garage working returning of end-of-life vehicles may vary from
according to the vehicle manufacturer's speci‐ country to country. Further information can be
fications with duly trained staff. If it is used oth‐ obtained from the Service centre.
erwise, it may disrupt the functions of the vehi‐
cle.◀
214
Replacing parts Mobility
Replacing parts
Vehicle equipment 3. Press together securing spring, arrow 1,
and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
and systems.
On-board tool kit

4. Take the wiper blade forwards out of the
fitting.
5. Insert new wiper blade in the opposite se‐
quence until it engages.
6. Fold in wipers.
Fold down wipers before opening the
bonnet
Before opening the bonnet, ensure that the
wiper arms with the wiper blades are resting on
Tool kit is located under boot floor. To open, the windscreen, otherwise damage may oc‐
lift narrow flap. cur.◀
Changing rear wiper blade

Replacing the wiper blades 1. Completely lift wiper and remove the wiper
blade, see arrow.
Note
Do not fold the wipers onto the wind‐
screen without wiper blades
Do not fold in wiper if no wiper blades are fit‐
ted, otherwise damage may occur to the wind‐
screen.◀
Front wiper blades, replacing

1. To replace the wiper blades, place the wip‐
ers in the fold-out position, see page 74. 2. Fit the new wiper blade and press until au‐
2. Fold out wiper arm and hold firm. dible engagement is heard.
3. Fold wipers in.
215
Mobility Replacing parts
Replacing bulbs Light-emitting diodes, LEDs

Some equipment versions have light-emitting
Information diodes behind a cover as a light source.
These resemble conventional lasers and are
Lights and bulbs classified by legislation as Class 1 light-emit‐
Lights and bulbs are an important aspect of ting diodes.
driving safety.
Do not remove the covers
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
Do not remove the covers or expose the
that you have the corresponding work carried
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source for
out by the Service Centre, if you are not famil‐
several hours at a time, as this could cause irri‐
iar with it or it is not described here.
tation to the retina.◀
A replacement bulb box can be obtained from
the Service centre.
Headlight glass
Risk of sustaining burns During cool or humid weather, the exterior
Only change bulbs while they are cool to lights can mist over. When driving with the light
the touch. Otherwise, burns could result.◀ switched on, the condensation disappears af‐
ter a short time. There is no need to replace
Working on the lighting system the headlight glass.
Before performing any work on the light‐ If the headlights do not defrost, even when
ing system, switch off the lights in question, driving with the lights switched on and increas‐
otherwise there is a risk of short-circuits. ing moisture builds up, for example water
Observe any instructions supplied by the bulb droplets in the lights, have these checked by
manufacturer to avoid the risk of injury or dam‐ the service centre.
age when changing bulbs.◀
Headlight adjustment
Do not perform any work on or replace
The adjustments of the headlight can be affec‐
bulbs on the xenon lights
ted by changing lights and bulbs. Have the
Work on the xenon light system, including bulb adjustment checked by the Service Cen‐
changing the bulb, must always be performed tre and have it corrected after changing them.
by a Service Centre. Otherwise there is a risk
of potentially fatal accidents if work is per‐
formed inexpertly, because of the high electri‐
cal voltages present.◀
Do not touch the bulbs

Do not touch the glass of a new bulb with
your fingers, because even slight amounts of
dirt or grease will then be burned into the bulb
and reduce its working life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or similar, or hold the
bulb by its base.◀
216
Front lights, replacing the bulbs Turn indicator

21 Watt bulb, PY21W.
Halogen headlights
1. If needed, pull the interior trim of the wheel
Headlights arch inwards. Turn the bulb holder anti‐
clockwise and remove.
1 Side lights
2. Press the bulb gently into the fitting, turn
2 High-beam headlights/headlight flasher
anticlockwise and remove.
3 Low-beam headlights
3. Fit new bulb and bulb holder in the reverse
4 Turn indicator sequence.
5 Daytime driving lights 4. Attach the cover in the wheel arch.
Access to turn indicators and low-beam

headlights
Follow the general instructions, see page 216.
In the wheel arches, remove both brackets and

the cover.
217
Low-beam headlights Access to daytime driving lights, Full

H7 bulb, 55 watts. beam/light signal and side light
1. Turn the cover anticlockwise and remove.
1. Open bonnet, see page 206.
2. Turn the cover anticlockwise and remove.
2. Release the bulb by tipping downwards

and up out of the holder and remove.
Side lights
6 watt bulb, H6W.
1. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise and re‐

move.
3. Remove plug from the bulb.

4. Connect plug to the new bulb.
5. First insert the bulb into the holder with the
eye, arrow 1, and then firmly push down‐
wards, arrow 2. Ensure that the bulb en‐
gages. 2. Press the bulb gently into the fitting, turn
3. To insert bulb and bulb holder, proceed in
the opposite sequence. Ensure that the
bulb holder engages.
4. Close headlight casing with lid Ensure that
the lid engages.

the lid engages.
7. Attach the cover in the wheel arch.
218
High-beam headlights/headlight flasher Daytime driving lights

H7 bulb, 55 watts. 24 Watt bulb, PW24W
1. Release the bulb by tipping downwards 1. If needed, remove plug from the high-
and up out of the holder and remove. beam bulb.
2. Pull out bulb holder.
2. Remove plug from the bulb.

3. Connect plug to the new bulb. 3. Remove bulb from bulb holder.
4. First insert the bulb into the holder with the 4. To insert the new bulb, proceed in the op‐
eye, arrow 1, and then firmly push down‐ posite sequence. The underneath of the
wards, arrow 2. Ensure that the bulb en‐ bulb holder must be pointing downwards
gages. when inserting. Ensure that the bulb holder
engages.
5. Connect the plug of the high-beam bulb.
the lid engages.
Xenon headlight
Xenon light
These bulbs have a very long service life and
5. Close headlight casing with lid Ensure that are highly unlikely to fail. Frequent switching
the lid engages. on and off shortens the service life.
If a bulb fails, you can continue driving moder‐
ately with fog lights. Observe any applicable
country-specific laws.
Do not perform any work on or replace
bulbs on the xenon lights
Work on the xenon light system, including
changing the bulb, must always be performed
by a Service Centre. Otherwise there is a risk
of potentially fatal accidents if work is per‐
formed inexpertly, because of the high electri‐
cal voltages present.◀
219
Headlights 21 Watts bulb, PY21W.
1. In the wheel arches, remove both brackets

and the cover.
1 Side lights/daytime driving lights

2 Low-beam headlights/high-beam head‐
lights/headlight flasher 2. If needed, pull the interior trim of the wheel
3 Turn indicator arch inwards. Turn the bulb holder anti‐
clockwise and remove.
The low-beam headlights and high-beam
headlights use xenon technology.
The side lights and daytime driving lights use
LED technology.
In the event of a defect, contact your Service
centre.
Turn indicator
Follow the general information, see page 216.
3. Press the bulb gently into the fitting, turn
4. Fit new bulb and bulb holder in the reverse
sequence.
5. Attach the cover in the wheel arch.
Front fog lights

H8 bulb, 35 watts.
1. With the handle of the screwdriver from the

on-board toolkit, unscrew the three
screws, arrows 1 of the wheel arch trim.
220
Carefully pull back wheel arch trim, ar‐ Rear lights, replacing the bulbs
row 2.
Overview
2. Pull the plug from the bulb, arrow 1.

Turn bulb, arrow 2. 1 Turn indicator
Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise. 2 Reversing lights
Right side of vehicle: turn anticlockwise. 3 Rear fog light
Remove bulb. 4 Rear lights

5 Brake light
Replacing bulbs of outer rear lights
General
Turn indicator: 21 watt bulb, P21WLL.
Brake lights: 21 Watt, H21W bulb.
3. Insert new bulb, connect plug and screw Rear lights are designed in LED technology. In
on wheel arch trim. the event of a defect, contact your Service
centre.
Turn indicator in exterior mirror Proceed with caution when changing the
Follow the general instructions, see page 216. bulb
Turn indicators in the exterior mirrors are de‐ Proceed with caution and take one step at a
signed in the LED technology. In the event of a time when changing bulbs, otherwise, the rear
defect, contact your Service centre. lights could be damaged.◀
221
Removing rear light ber sealing ring on the linkage of the cen‐
1. Opening the tailgate. tring is plugged in.
2. Press in the catches with the screwdriver

from the on-board toolkit, following arrows,
and remove blind.
5. Undo upper rest on the plug of the con‐

necting cable and remove plug from the
bulb holder.
3. Undo both nuts with the handle of the

Replacing bulbs
screwdriver, arrows.
1. Undo the five fastenings, arrow 1, on the
bulb holder and remove the bulb holder
from the tail light, arrow 2.
4. Grasp the rear lights on the inner edge,

following arrow 1, and carefully pull back
and out, arrow 2. In so doing, hold against
your free hand, so that the tail light does 2. Press the faulty bulb gently into the fitting,
not undo jerkily. Check that the foam rub‐ turn anticlockwise and remove.
3. To use the new bulb and attach the bulb
holder, proceed in the opposite sequence.
Ensure that the bulb holder engages in all
fastenings.
Installing rear light

1. Connect the connecting cable to the tail
light and fix into the bracket of the bulb
holder.
2. Ensure that the sealing ring on the pump of
the centring is present and undamaged.
3. Put the rear light outer onto the rubber
bearing, arrow 1, and into the screws, ar‐
222
row 2, and push firmly. Ensure that the tail Changing rear lights and rear fog lights
light engages in the rubber bearing. 1. Undo both fastenings, arrow 1, and pull the
lamp holder downwards, arrow 2.
4. Screw on both nuts and fit the blind.

2. Undo faulty lamp for reversing and rear fog
Lights in the tailgate lights from the socket by turning anti-
clockwise.
General
3. Install new bulb.
Reversing lights: 16 Watt bulb, PW16W Install lamp holder
Rear fog lights: 21 Watt bulb, H21W. 1. Push bulb holder onto both guide pins, ar‐
row 1. Therefore, plug in both contacts, ar‐
Access to the lights row 2, into the connectors, arrow 3.
Push the cover outwards, following the arrow, 2. Press on the lamp holder. Ensure that both
and remove. fastenings engage on the outside.
3. Put the cover back on and push inwards.
Rear lights, number plate lights and

centre brake lights
These lights use LED technology. In the event
of a defect, contact your Service centre.
223
Changing a wheel 2. Unscrew wheel stud.

After reattaching the wheel stud, remove the
Information adapter again.
For tyres with emergency running properties
or when using sealants, immediate wheel
change for tyre pressure loss in case of break‐ Car battery
down is not required.
As a result, no spare wheel is available. Maintenance
The tools for changing wheels are available as The battery is maintenance-free.
optional accessories from your Service Centre. The quantity of acid filled is sufficient for the
lifetime of the battery.
Jack mounting points Further information about the battery is avail‐
able from your Service Centre.
Replacing the battery

Only use approved vehicle batteries.
Only use vehicle batteries that are ap‐
proved by the manufacturer of your vehicle.
Otherwise the vehicle may be damaged and
availability of systems or functions may be limi‐
ted.◀
The jack mounting points are located in the il‐
lustrated positions. After changing the vehicle battery, register it
with your Service Centre, so that all the com‐
fort functions are available without limitation
Thiefproof wheel studs and any check control messages of these
The adapter of the thiefproof wheel studs can comfort functions are no longer shown.
be found in the tool kit or in an oddments tray
in the tool kit. Recharging the battery
Note
Do not connect chargers to 12 volt sock‐
ets in the vehicle
Do not connect battery chargers to the 12 volt
sockets installed in the vehicle in the factory,
otherwise increased current consumption in
the vehicle could damage the vehicle battery.◀
▷ Wheel stud, arrow 1. General

▷ Adapter, arrow 2. Ensure the battery is sufficiently charged to
guarantee the entire lifetime of the battery.
Removing In the following cases, charging the battery is
necessary:
1. Place the adapter on the wheel stud.
224
▷ When making frequent short trips. Plastic tweezers and details of the fuse assign‐
▷ When leaving for periods of longer than ment can be found with the fuses in the boot.
one month.
In the engine compartment
Jump-starting connections 1. Undo the three screws of the cover, ar‐
Recharge the battery only with the engine row 1, with the on-board tool.
stopped, via the jump-starting connections,
see page 229, in the engine compartment.
Charger
Chargers developed especially for the vehicle
and attuned to the on-board network can be
obtained from the Service centre.
Power failure
Following a temporary electrical power outage, 2. Pull fastening upwards, arrow 2.
some equipment will have to be reinitialised or 3. Remove cover from the side, arrow 3.
individual settings will need to be updated, for
4. Press on the four fastenings and remove
example:
the lid.
▷ Seat and mirror memory: re-save positions.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass Roof: initialise system, see page 48.
Disposing of the old battery

Dispose of old batteries only at an au‐
thorised collecting point or hand them
in to your Service centre.
Batteries filled with acid should be transported Attaching covers
and stored upright. Protect batteries against
1. When attaching the lid, ensure that all four
falling over when in transit.
fastenings are engaged.
2. Attach cover under the rubber lip and then
thread between the webs.
Fuses
Information
Replacing fuses
Do not repair blown fuses or replace
them with fuses with different colours or am‐
pere ratings, otherwise overloaded electrical
wires could cause a fire in the vehicle.◀
225
3. Press fastening downwards and tighten

the three screws.
Inside the boot
Fold up boot floor.
The fuses are situated underneath a cover. To

open, grasp the side slot and fold the cover up.
Details of the fuse assignment are on a sepa‐

rate leaflet.
226
Help in the event of a breakdown Mobility
Help in the event of a breakdown

Vehicle equipment Information
This chapter describes all standard, national Emergency call not ensured
and special equipment provided in the model For technical reasons, it might not be
series. Equipment not available in a vehicle is possible to make an emergency call in highly
therefore also described, for example the se‐ adverse conditions.◀
This also applies to safety-relevant functions Overview
and systems.
Hazard warning lights
SOS button in headlining
Requirements
The button is located in the centre console. ▷ SIM card integrated into the vehicle is acti‐
vated.
▷ Radio ready state is switched on.
Intelligent emergency call ▷ Emergency call system is functional.
Principle Making an emergency call

This system can be used for sending an emer‐ 1. Briefly press the cover flap to open it.
gency call in emergency situations. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED on the
button is illuminated green.
General ▷ LED illuminated green: emergency call ac‐
Press the SOS button in an emergency only. tivated.
Even if no emergency call through BMW is If a cancellation request is shown on the
possible, in some cases an emergency call display, the emergency call can be cancel‐
may still be set up to a public emergency call led.
number. This depends on factors such as the If the situation permits, wait in the vehicle
specific mobile phone network and the na‐ until voice contact has been established.
tional regulations.
▷ LED flashes green when the connection to
the emergency number has been estab‐
lished.
227
Mobility Help in the event of a breakdown
When an emergency call is sent via BMW, Storage

data is sent to the emergency call centre in
order to decide what rescue measures are
required. For example, the current position
of the vehicle, if this can be determined. If
questions posed by the emergency call
centre remain unanswered, rescue meas‐
ures are automatically initiated.
▷ If the LED is flashing green but the emer‐
gency response centre can no longer be
heard over the loudspeaker, you may still
The first-aid kit is located behind the left cover
be able to be heard by the emergency re‐
panel in the boot.
sponse centre.
Automatically activating emergency

calls Mobile Service
In certain circumstances, an emergency call
may be placed automatically immediately after Standby
a serious accident. An automatic emergency In many countries, the Mobile Service is avail‐
call is not influenced by pressing the SOS but‐ able by phone twenty-four hours a day, seven
ton. days a week. This service can render assis‐
tance in the event of a breakdown.
Warning triangle Breakdown assistance

If you need breakdown assistance, use the
iDrive to view the number or to establish a con‐
nection directly to the Mobile Service.
For further information, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication.
Starting assistance
The warning triangle is located in the tailgate.
To open the locks, turn the arrows through Notes
90°. Open the trim panel. If the vehicle battery is discharged, the engine
can be started using two jump leads from an‐
other vehicle’s battery. Use only jump leads
with fully insulated terminal clamps.
First-aid kit
Do not deviate from the procedure described
Note below, as otherwise personal injury could re‐
sult or both vehicles could be damaged.
The longevity of some items is limited.
Check the use-by dates of the contents regu‐
larly and replace any items that have expired.
228
Do not touch live parts

Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal accident
could occur.◀
Preparations
1. Check whether the battery in the other ve‐
hicle shows 12 volts. Specifications are on
the battery.
The battery negative terminal is the body earth
2. Switch off the engine of the donor vehicle. or a special nut.
3. Switch off any electrical systems in both
vehicles.
Connecting the cables
Avoid contact between the vehicle bod‐ 1. Open the cover of the BMW starting assis‐
ies tance connection.
The bodies of the two vehicles must not make 2. Connect a terminal clamp on the positive/+
contact, otherwise there is the risk of a short- jump lead to the positive terminal of the
circuit.◀ battery or the corresponding jump-starting
connection on the donor vehicle.
Jump-starting connections 3. Connect the other terminal clamp to the
Order for connecting battery's positive terminal or to the corre‐
sponding jump-starting connection on the
Connect the jump leads in the correct or‐
vehicle to be started.
der to avoid sparks that could cause injury.◀
4. Connect a terminal clamp on the negative/–
jump lead to the negative terminal of the
battery or the corresponding engine or
body earth connection on the donor vehi‐
cle.
5. Connect the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery or to a
ground/earth connection on the corre‐
sponding engine or body of the vehicle to
be started.
The jump-starting connection in the engine
compartment serves as the positive battery Starting the engine
terminal. Do not use the spray products sold as starting
Open the cover of the starting assistance con‐ aids.
nection.
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at a slightly
increased idle speed.
229
For diesel-engined vehicles to be started: ▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
allow the engine of the donor vehicle to run raised, otherwise the steering can turn.
for approx. 10 minutes. ▷ When the engine is not running, there is no
2. Start the engine of the vehicle to be started power assistance and the brake servo is
as normal. out of action. The steering and brakes will
If an initial attempt to start the engine fails, require extra effort to operate.
wait several minutes until the flat battery ▷ Greater steering wheel movements are
has been recharged to a slightly greater necessary.
degree. ▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter
3. Allow both engines to run for a few mi‐ than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may be
nutes. unable to keep the towed vehicle reliably
4. Disconnect the jump leads in the opposite under control.
order from that in which they were origi‐
nally attached. Towing truck
Check the battery if necessary and have it re‐
With driven rear axle
charged.

Note
When tow-starting or towing, switch off
the intelligent safety systems, otherwise an ac‐
cident may be caused by the malfunction of
Have the vehicle transported by a towing truck
the brake actuation function of individual sys‐
with a hoisting frame, or hoisted onto a loading
tems.◀
platform.
Manual gearbox Do not raise the vehicle

Gearshift lever in idle position. Do not raise the vehicle at the towing eye
or by body or suspension components, other‐
Being towed wise it could be damaged.◀
Comply with the instructions for towing/
being towed
Comply with all instructions on towing/being
towed; failure to do so could result in damage
to the vehicle or an accident.◀
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on,

otherwise low-beam headlights, rear lights,
turn indicators and wipers would not be
available.
230
With xDrive Towing truck
Only have the vehicle transported on a load Only have the vehicle transported on a load
platform. platform.
Do not tow the vehicle using individually Do not raise the vehicle
raised front or rear axles Do not raise the vehicle at the towing eye
Do not tow the BMW using individually raised or by body or suspension components, other‐
front or rear axles, as otherwise the wheels wise it could be damaged.◀
could jam and the transfer gearbox can be
Use the towing eye screwed into the socket at
damaged.◀
the front of the vehicle for manoeuvring only.
Do not raise the vehicle
Do not raise the vehicle at the towing eye
Towing other vehicles
or by body or suspension components, other‐
wise it could be damaged.◀
Information
Light towing vehicle
Steptronic transmission: transporting The towing vehicle must not be lighter
your vehicle than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may be
unable to keep the towed vehicle reliably under
Note control.◀
Do not attempt to have your vehicle towed.
Attaching the tow bar/towing rope
Consequently, contact your Service Centre in
the event of a breakdown. Only attach the tow bar or towing rope to
the towing eye. Attaching the towing rope to
Do not tow the vehicle other parts of the vehicle can result in dam‐
Have your vehicle transported on a load age.◀
platform, otherwise damage might result.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning lights, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the vehicle's electrical system has failed,
the vehicle being towed must be made
identifiable to following vehicles, for in‐
stance by placing a notice or the warning
triangle in the rear window.
231
Tow bar ▷ Avoid lateral loads on the towing eye, for

The towing eyes of both vehicles should be on example do not raise the vehicle at the
the same side. towing eye.
If it is impossible to avoid attaching the tow bar Otherwise the towing eye and the vehicle
at an angle, note the following: could be damaged.◀
▷ Tow bar clearance may be restricted when
cornering. Thread for towing eye
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is attached offset.
Towing rope
Ensure that the towing rope is taut when the
towing vehicle moves off.
For towing, use nylon ropes or straps, as these
will help to avoid sudden tensile loads.
Towing eye Press the marking on the edge of the cover to

press it out.
Always have the screw-on towing eye on
board the vehicle.
The towing eye can be screwed into the front Tow-starting
or rear end of the BMW.
Do not attempt to tow-start or push-start the
vehicle.
Due to the Steptronic transmission, it is not
possible to start the engine by towing.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties recti‐
fied.
Manual gearbox
The towing eye is located in the on-board tool‐ If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
kit under the boot floor. To open, lift narrow start the engine using starting assistance, see
flap. page 228. Only tow-start when the engine is
cold if your vehicle has a catalytic converter.
Towing eye, information on use
1. Switching on hazard warning lights, please
▷ Use only the towing eye supplied observe country-specific regulations.
with the vehicle, and make sure that
2. Ignition, see page 67, on.
it is screwed in fully and is tight.
3. Insert 3rd gear.
▷ Only use the towing eye for towing on nor‐
mal roads (in other words not off-road). 4. Tow-start with the clutch depressed and
release the clutch slowly. Depress the
clutch again immediately after the engine
starts.
232
5. Stop in a suitable location, remove the tow

bar or towing rope and switch off the haz‐
ard warning lights.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
233
Mobility General care
General care
Vehicle equipment cle for sustained periods and maintain a dis‐
tance of at least 30 cm, 12 in. This applies to
This chapter describes all standard, national systems such as Park Distance Control.◀
Automatic car washes.
Information
and systems. ▷ Textile car washes or systems using soft
brushes are preferable, to avoid damage to
the paintwork.
Washing the car ▷ Make sure the wheels and tyres are not
damaged by the conveying mechanism.
General ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors, as they could
Regularly remove foreign bodied, for example, otherwise sustain damage due to the vehi‐
leaves, with the bonnet opened in the area be‐ cle's width.
neath with windscreen. ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, see page 73, to
Especially in winter, wash the car more fre‐ avoid unintentional operation of the wipers.
quently. Very high levels of dirt and spreading ▷ In some instances, depending on the inte‐
salt can cause damage to the car. rior movement detector of the alarm sys‐
tem, a false alarm may be triggered. Ob‐
Information serve the information on avoiding false
Steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure alarms, see page 44.
cleaners Guide rails in car washes
If you use steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure Avoid car washes where the guide rails
cleaners, make sure you maintain an adequate are higher than 10 cm, 4 in otherwise the car
distance and a maximum temperature of body may be damaged.◀
60 ℃/140 ℉.
With the glass roof keep a distance of at least Entering a car wash
80 cm, approximately 31.5 inches. High-pres‐
Follow the below steps so that the vehicle can
sure jets striking it from close up or with exces‐
be driven into a vehicle wash:
sively high pressure or temperature could
cause damage, or start off a process of long- Manual gearbox:
term damage. 1. Drive into the car wash.
Comply with the instructions for the high-pres‐ 2. Engage idle position.
sure cleaner.◀
3. Stop the engine.
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high- 4. Switch on ignition.
pressure cleaners Steptronic transmission:
Do not direct high-pressure cleaners at the
sensors or cameras on the outside of the vehi‐ 1. Drive into the car wash.
234
General care Mobility
2. Engage selector lever position N. After washing the car

3. Stop the engine. After washing the car, drive it briefly and apply
In this way the ignition remains switched the brakes to dry them out; this is necessary to
on and a check control message is dis‐ prevent reduced braking action, and also to
played. avoid corrosion of the brake discs.
Completely remove residues on the wind‐
Do not switch off ignition in the car
screens to avoid affecting visibility due to
wash
smearing, and to reduce wiping noise and
Do not switch off ignition in the car wash, wiper blade wear.
otherwise the selector lever position P is
engaged and this can cause damage.◀
It is not possible to lock the vehicle from the Car care

outside in selector lever position N. If an at‐
tempt is made to lock the vehicle, a signal Care products
sounds. BMW recommends that you use BMW care
When starting engine with manual gearbox: and cleaning products, as these have been
tested and approved.
1. Press clutch pedal.
Care and cleaning products
2. Press the start/stop button.
Observe the information on the pack.
When starting engine with Steptronic trans‐
mission: When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
1. Press the brake.
Use only products that are intended for clean‐
2. Press the start/stop button. ing the vehicle's interior.
Pressing the start/stop button or depressing Cleaning agents can contain hazardous sub‐
the brake switches off the ignition. stances or constitute a health risk.◀
Selector lever position

Vehicle paintwork
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
Regular care promotes driving safety and pre‐
cally:
serves your vehicle's value. Environmental ef‐
▷ With the ignition switched off. fects in areas with higher air pollution or natu‐
▷ After approximately 15 minutes. ral contaminations, for example tree resin or
leaf dust, may have an effect on the vehicle
Headlights paintwork. Base the frequency and extent of
▷ Do not rub them when dry or use abrasive vehicle care on such factors.
or corrosive cleaning agents. Remove corrosive substances, such as run-off
▷ Soak impurities such as insects with sham‐ fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings immediately
poo and wash off with water. to avoid changes to the paint or discoloura‐
tions.
▷ Remove ice with a de-icer spray; do not
use an ice scraper.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather at regular inter‐
vals with a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
235
Mobility General care
Dust and road dirt will otherwise become Chrome surfaces

worked into pores and folds, causing consider‐ Carefully clean parts such as the radiator grille
able abrasion and causing the leather surface and door handles with plenty of water to which
to become prematurely brittle. a shampoo may be added, particularly if ex‐
In order to protect against discolouration, for posed to road salt.
example from clothing, clean the leather ap‐
proximately every two months. Rubber parts
Clean light-coloured leather more frequently Other than washing with water, treat only with
as it has the tendency to soil faster. rubber care products.
Use leather cleaner, as dirt and grease with Do not use any silicone-based care products
otherwise attack the protective coating of the for treating rubber seals, otherwise these
leather. could be damaged and become a source of
Suitable cleaner can be obtained from a Serv‐ noise.
ice centre.
Fine wood parts
Care of upholstery fabrics Clean fine wood trims and fine wood parts with
Clean regularly with a vacuum cleaner. a damp cloth only. Then dry them with a soft
cloth.
In the event of heavy soiling, for example stains
caused by drinks, use a soft sponge or a lint-
Plastic parts
free microfibre cloth with suitable interior
cleaning agents. These include:
Clean upholstery materials over a large area up ▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
to the seams. Avoid strong rubbing. ▷ Roof lining.
Damage from Velcro fasteners ▷ Light covers.
Open Velcro fasteners on trousers or ▷ Glass cover of instrument cluster.
other items of clothing can damage seat cov‐ ▷ Parts sprayed matt black.
ers. Make sure that any Velcro fasteners on ▷ Painted parts in the interior.
your clothing are closed.◀
Use a microfibre cloth to clean.
Slightly moisten the cloth with water.
Care of special parts
Do not soak the roof lining.
Light alloy wheels No alcohol-based or solvent-based
Only when cleaning on the vehicle use neutral cleaning agents
rim cleaner with a pH value of between 5 and 9. Do not use any alcohol-based or solvent-
Do not use any rough cleaner or steam cleaner based cleaning agents such as nitro thinners,
above 60 ℃/140 ℉. Observe the manufactur‐ cold cleansers, fuel or similar, otherwise the
er's information. surfaces can be damaged.◀
Corrosive, acidic or alkaline cleaners may de‐
stroy the protective layer of neighbouring
Seat belts
parts, such as brake discs, for example.
Dirt on the seat belts can interfere with the ac‐
tion of the reel and represent a safety hazard.
236
General care Mobility
Dry cleaning Displays/screens

Do not dry-clean or use chemical prod‐ Cleaning of displays and screens
ucts, otherwise the fabric may be weakened.◀
Do not use any chemical or household
Clean only with a mild soap solution while still cleaning materials, otherwise surfaces may be
fitted to the vehicle. corroded.◀
Never allow seat belts to retract unless they Keep moisture away
are dry.
Keep all liquids away from the set, other‐
wise electrical components may be dam‐
Carpets and foot mats
aged.◀
No objects in the range of movement of
the pedals Avoid pressure
Foot mats, carpets or other objects must not Avoid applying excessive pressure when
breach the range of movement of the pedals, cleaning and do not use abrasive materials,
otherwise they could influence the function of otherwise damage could occur.◀
the pedals when driving and may cause an ac‐
Use a clean, anti-static microfibre cloth to
cident.
clean.
Do not place additional foot mats on top of ex‐
isting floor mats or other similar objects. Laying up out of use
Only use foot mats that have been approved When the vehicle is laid up for longer than
for the vehicle and that can be fastened ac‐ three months, special measures are to be
cordingly. taken. Further information can be obtained
Ensure that floor mats are securely reattached from the Service Centre.
after having been removed, for example for
cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the vehicle to

enable the interior to be cleaned more thor‐
oughly.
In the event of heavy soiling, clean floor car‐
pets using a microfibre cloth and water or tex‐
tile cleaner. In doing so, rub back and forth in
the direction of travel, otherwise the carpet can
become tangled.
Sensors/cameras
Clean sensors or cameras using a cloth mois‐
tened with a small amount of a glass-cleaning
product.
237
Reference
The section contains the technical data and the
alphabetical index that will lead you to the
desired information in the quickest manner
possible.

Reference Technical data
Technical data
Information
The technical data and specifications in the the permit documents, on information signs on
Owner's Handbook are indications. The vehi‐ the vehicle or can be requested from the Serv‐
cle-specific data can deviate from this, for ex‐ ice Centre.
ample, due to the selected special equipment, The information in the vehicle documents al‐
national version or country-specific measure‐ ways has priority.
ment method. Detailed values can be found in
Dimensions
Information
The dimensions can vary depending on the or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for exam‐
model version, equipment or country-specific ple, due to the selected special equipment,
measurement method. tyres, loads and chassis design.
The heights specified do not take into account
add-on parts such as a roof aerial, roof railing
BMW 3 Series Touring
Width with mirrors mm 2031
Width without mirrors mm 1811
Height mm 1416–1434
Length mm 4624
Wheelbase mm 2810
Smallest turning circle dia. m/ft 11.3–11.7/37.1–38.4
Weights
Values in front of the / are for vehicles with
manual gearbox, values after the / are for vehi‐
cles with Steptronic transmission.
240
Technical data Reference
316i
Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, kg (lb) 1525/1545
tank 90 % full, no optional extras (3363/3407)
Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 2045/2065

(4508/4552)
Load kg (lb) 595 (1311)
Front axle load limit kg (lb) 885 (1951)
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1225 (2700)
Roof load kg (lb) 75 (165)
Boot capacity litres (cu ft) 495–1500 (17.47–

52.95)
320i

(4552/4607)
Load kg (lb) 595 (1311)

52.95)
328i

(4596/4629)
Load kg (lb) 575/560 (1267/1234)
241
328i

52.95)
335i

(4706/4728)
Load kg (lb) 560 (1234)

52.95)
320i xDrive

(4695/4739)
Load kg (lb) 575 (1267)

52.95)
242
328i xDrive

(4717/4761)
Load kg (lb) 550 (1212)

52.95)
335i xDrive
Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, kg (lb) 1730 (3814)
tank 90 % full, no optional extras
Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 2205 (4861)
Load kg (lb) 550 (1212)

52.95)
316d

(4574/4618)
Load kg (lb) 595 (1311)
243
316d

52.95)
318d

(4574/4618)
Load kg (lb) 595 (1311)

52.95)
320d

(4607/4640)
Load kg (lb) 595 (1311)

52.95)
244
320d ed

(4508/4541)
Load kg (lb) 550 (1212)

52.95)
325d

(4629/4673)
Load kg (lb) 560 (1234)

52.95)
330d
Load kg (lb) 550 (1212)
245
330d

52.95)
318d xDrive
Load kg (lb) 575 (1267)

52.95)
320d xDrive

(4739/4761)
Load kg (lb) 575 (1267)

52.95)
246
330d xDrive
Load kg (lb) 550 (1212)

52.95)
335d xDrive
Load kg (lb) 550 (1212)

52.95)
Towing a trailer
Values in front of the / are for vehicles with
manual gearbox, values after the / are for vehi‐
cles with Steptronic transmission.
316i
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Details on possible increases can be queried at
the Service Centre.
Unbraked kg (lb) 695 (1532)
With brake on upward incline up to 12 % kg (lb) 1100 (2425)
247
316i
Maximum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 75 (165)
Minimum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 25 (55)

(4673/4717)
320i
the Service Centre.
With brake on upward incline up to 12 % kg (lb) 1400/1500

(3086/3306)

(4717/4772)
328i
the Service Centre.
248
328i

(4761/4795)
335i
the Service Centre.

(4872/4894)
320i xDrive
the Service Centre.

(4861/4905)
249
328i xDrive
the Service Centre.

(4883/4927)
335i xDrive
Trailer loads in accordance with EC operating permit. Details on possible increases can be quer‐
ied at the Service Centre.
316d
the Service Centre.
250
316d

(4739/4783)
318d
the Service Centre.

(4739/4783)
320d
the Service Centre.

(4772/4806)
251
320d ed
the Service Centre.
Unbraked kg (lb) –/745 (–/1642)
With brake on upward incline up to 12 % kg (lb) –/1600 (–/3527)
With brake on upward incline up to 8 % kg (lb) –/1800 (–/3968)
Maximum trailer nose weight kg (lb) –/75 (–/165)
Minimum trailer nose weight kg (lb) –/25 (–/55)
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) –/1310 (–/2888)
Permitted gross weight kg (lb) –/2135 (–/4706)
325d
the Service Centre.

(4795/4839)
330d
the Service Centre.
252
330d
318d xDrive
the Service Centre.
320d xDrive
the Service Centre.

(4905/4927)
253
330d xDrive
the Service Centre.
335d xDrive
the Service Centre.
Filling capacities
Litres/Imp. units Note
Fuel tank, approximately. Petrol: 60/13.2 Fuel grade, see

Diesel: 57/12.5 page 196
254
255
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Anti-freeze protection, Automatic transmission, see
washer fluid 75 Steptronic transmission 75
ABS, anti-lock braking sys‐ Anti-lock braking system, AUTO program, air condi‐
tem 126 ABS 126 tioner 154
ACC, Active Cruise Control Anti-theft alarm system, see AUTO program, automatic air
with Stop & Go 132 Alarm system 43 conditioning 156
Acceleration assistant, see Anti-theft system, wheel AUTO program, intensity 156
Launch Control 78 studs 224 Auto Start Stop function 69
Accessories and parts 7 Anti-trap mechanism, Glass Average fuel consumption 92
Activation, airbags 105 Roof 47 Average speed 92
Active Cruise Control with Anti-trap mechanism, win‐ Axle load limit 240
Stop & Go, ACC 132 dows 45 Axle loads, weight 240
Active Protection 124 Aquaplaning 175
Adaptive brake light, see Dy‐ Around the centre con‐ B
namic brake lights 124 sole 14
Adaptive Headlights 98 Around the headlining 15 Backrest contour, see Lum‐
Additives, oil 209 Around the steering wheel 12 bar support 51
Adjust headlights 101 Arrival time 92 Backrest width 51
After washing the car 235 Ashtray 160 Bar for tow-starting/
Age of tyres 199 Attentiveness assistant 124 towing 231
Airbags 103 AUC, automatic air recircula‐ Battery, vehicle 224
Airbags, indicator/warning tion control 157 Being towed, see Tow-start‐
light 104 AUTO intensity 156 ing/towing 230
Airbag switch, see Key switch Automatic air condition‐ Belts, seat belts 52
for front passenger air‐ ing 153 Black ice, see Outside tem‐
bags 105 Automatic air conditioning perature warning 85
Air conditioning 155 with extended functional‐ Block, power windows 46
Air Conditioning 153 ity 155 Blower, see air flow 154
Air distribution, man‐ Automatic air recirculation Blower, see Air flow 157
ual 154, 157 control, AUC 157 BMW Maintenance Sys‐
Air flow, air conditioning 154 Automatic anti-glare control, tem 212
Air flow, automatic air condi‐ see High-beam assis‐ BMW Services, see Owner's
tioning 157 tance 99 Handbook for Navigation,
Air outlets, see Ventila‐ Automatic Cruise Control Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 158 with Stop & Go 132 tion
Air pressure, tyres 198 Automatic driving lights con‐ Bonnet 206
Alarm, false 44 trol 98 Bonus range, ECO PRO 185
Alarm system 43 Automatic locking 43 Boot 162
All-season tyres, see Winter Automatic parking func‐ Boot cover 162
tyres 200 tion 58 Boot, storage space 168
Alternative oil grades 210 Automatic tailgate 38
256
Everything from A to Z Reference
Bottle holder, see Cu‐ CD/Multimedia, see Owner's Comfort opening with the re‐
pholder 168 Handbook for Navigation, mote control 35
Brake assist 126 Entertainment, Communica‐ COMFORT program, driving
Brake lights, adaptive 124 tion dynamics 129
Brake lights, dynamic 124 Central key, see Remote con‐ Compressor 202
Braking, information 175 trol 32 Computer, see On-board
Braking safely 175 Central locking system 37 computer 91
Breakdown Assist 227 Central screen, see Control Condensate under the vehi‐
Breakdown service, mobile display 16 cle 176
service 228 Centre armrest 167 Condensation on win‐
Breakdown, wheel Centre console 14 dows 154, 157
change 224 Changes, technical, see Your Condition Based Service,
Brightness of the Control Dis‐ own safety 7 CBS 212
play 94 Changing bulb, rear 221 Configuring drive pro‐
Bulb change, halogen head‐ Charcoal canister 158 gram 130
lights 217 Chassis number, see Vehicle Confirmation signals 43
Bulb change, rear 221 identification number 8 ConnectedDrive, see Owner's
Bulb change, xenon head‐ Check control 81 Handbook for Navigation,
light 219 Checking the oil level elec‐ Entertainment, Communica‐
Button RES 135 tronically 208 tion
Buttons on the steering Child's seats 60 ConnectedDrive services
wheel 12 Child locks 66 Connecting electrical applian‐
Button, start/stop 67 Children, carrying 60 ces 161
Child restraints 60 Contactless closing of tail‐
C Child seat classes, ISOFIX 63 gate 41
Child seat mounting 61 Contactless opening of tail‐
Camera, rear-view cam‐ Child seat mountings, ISO‐ gate 41
era 143 FIX 62 Continuing a journey with a
Cameras, care 237 Chrome parts, care 236 flat tyre 107, 110
Camera, Side View 146 Cigarette lighter 160 Control display 16
Camera, Top View 148 Cleaning displays 237 Control display, settings 93
Car care 235 Clock 86 Controller 16, 17
Care, displays 237 Closing/opening using door Control systems, driving sta‐
Care products 235 lock 37 bility 126
Care, vehicle 235 Closing/opening with remote Coolant 211
Car jack 224 control 35 Coolant level 211
Car key, see Remote con‐ Coasting 188 Coolant temperature 85
trol 32 Coasting in idle 188 Cooling effect, maximum 156
Carpet, care 237 Coat hooks 168 Cooling function 154, 156
Carrying children safely 60 Cockpit 12 Cooling system 211
Car washes 234 Cold start, see Engine Corrosion of brake discs 176
Catalytic converter, see Hot start 68 Cruise Control 138
exhaust system 175 Comfort Access 40 Cruise Control, Active with
CBS, Condition Based Serv‐ Comfort closing with the re‐ Stop & Go 132
ice 212 mote control 36 Cruise Control, see Active
Cruise Control 132
257
Cupholder 168 Driver assistance info, on the EfficientDynamics menu 187

Current fuel consumption 86 control display 94 Electrical power windows 44
Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐ Electric steering wheel
D gent Safety 111 lock 59
Driving hints 174 Electronic displays, instru‐
Damage, tyres 199 Driving information, gen‐ ment cluster 80
Damper Control, dy‐ eral 174 Electronic oil measure‐
namic 128 Driving information, running ment 208
Data, technical 240 in 174 Electronic Stability Program,
Date 86 Driving instruction, ECO ESP, see DSC 126
Daytime driving lights 98 PRO 186 Emergency call 227
Deactivation, airbags 105 Driving into a car wash 234 Emergency release, fuel filler
Defrosting, see Defrosting Driving lane lines, rear-view flap 194
windows 157 camera 144 Emergency service, see mo‐
Defrosting windows 154, 157 Driving lights control, auto‐ bile service 228
Defrost, see Defrosting win‐ matic 98 Emergency start function, en‐
dows 157 Driving stability control sys‐ gine start 33
Deleting personal data 22 tems 126 Emergency unlocking, trans‐
Diesel fuel 196 Driving style analysis 190 mission lockout 78
Diesel particle filter 175 Drying air, see Cooling func‐ Energy Control 86
Digital clock 86 tion 154, 156 Energy recuperation 86
Dimensions 240 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Engine, automatic shutoff 69
Dimmable exterior mirrors 58 trol 126 Engine, automatic start-stop
Dimming rear-view mirror 58 DTC, Dynamic Traction Con‐ function 69
Dipping headlights, see High- trol 127 Engine compartment 206
beam assistance 99 Dynamic brake lights 124 Engine coolant 211
Display in windscreen 94 Dynamic Damper Con‐ Engine idling when driving,
Display lighting, see Instru‐ trol 128 coasting 188
ment lighting 101 Dynamic Stability Control, Engine oil 208
Displays, cleaning 237 DSC 126 Engine oil additives 209
Displays, electronic, instru‐ Dynamic Traction Control, Engine oil change 210
ment cluster 80 DTC 127 Engine oil filler neck 209
Disposal, coolant 211 Engine oil grades, alterna‐
Disposal, vehicle battery 225 E tive 210
Distance to destination 92 Engine oil grades, ap‐
Distance warning, see ECO PRO 184 proved 210
PDC 140 ECO PRO, bonus range 185 Engine oil level, checking
Door key, see Remote con‐ ECO PRO display 184 electronically 208
trol 32 ECO PRO drive mode 184 Engine oils, approved 210
Door lock 37 ECO PRO driving style analy‐ Engine oil temperature 85
Downhill gradients 176 sis 190 Engine start 68
Drinks holder, see Cu‐ ECO PRO mode 184 Engine start with malfunc‐
pholder 168 ECO PRO, route-ahead assis‐ tion 33
Drive experience switch 128 tant 187 Engine temperature 85
Drive mode 128 ECO PRO tip 186 Entering letters and digits 23
Drive-off assistant 130 EfficientDynamics 187
258
ESP, Electronic Stability Pro‐ Front-end collision warning Hazard warning and indicator
gram, see DSC 126 with city braking func‐ lights, see Check control 81
Exhaust system 175 tion 112 Hazard warning lights 227
Expanding the boot 163 Front fog lights 100 Head airbags 103
Extended BMW Online Serv‐ Front head restraints 54 Head Light 98
ices, see Owner's Handbook Front lights 217 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
for Navigation, Entertain‐ Front neck supports, see ture 98
ment, Communication Head restraints 54 Headlight flasher 72
Exterior mirror, automatically Front passenger airbags, de‐ Headlight lens 216
dimming 58 activating/activating 105 Headlights 217
Exterior mirrors 57 Front passenger airbags, Headlights, care 235
External starting 228 light 105 Headlight washer system 72
Eye for securing cable, trailer Fuel 196 Headlining 15
towing 182 Fuel consumption, see Aver‐ Head restraints 49
Eye for towing, see Towing age fuel consumption 92 Head-Up Display 94
eye 232 Fuel filler flap 194 Head-up Display, care 237
Eyes for securing load 177 Fuel gauge 85 Heated rear window 154, 157
Fuel quality 196 Heavy transported load, load‐
F Fuel recommendation 196 ing 177
Fuel tank cap 194 Height, vehicle 240
Failure message, see Check Fuel, tank capacity 254 Help in driving off 130
control 81 Fuse 225 High-beam assistance 99
False alarm 44 High-beam headlights 72
Fastening seat belts, see Seat G Hill Start Assist, see Drive-off
belts 52 assistant 130
Fault displays, see Check Gearbox, manual gearbox 75 Horn 12
control 81 Gearbox, Steptronic trans‐ Hot exhaust system 175
Favourites buttons, iDrive 22 mission 75 HUD Head-Up Display 94
Filler neck for engine oil 209 Gear change, Steptronic
Fine wood, care 236 transmission 76 I
First-aid kit 228 Gearshift, manual gearbox 75
Flat tyre, warning Gearshift, Steptronic trans‐ IBA Integrated Owner's
lamp 107, 109 mission 75 Handbook in vehicle 27
Flooding 175 General driving informa‐ Ice warning, see Outside tem‐
Floor carpet, care 237 tion 174 perature warning 85
Fog lights, replacing the Glare protection 160 Identification number, see Ve‐
bulbs 220 Glass Roof, see Panorama hicle identification num‐
Fold-out position, wiper 74 Glass Roof 46 ber 8
Foot brake 175 Glove box 166 iDrive 16
Foot mats, care 237 Green diesel 196 Ignition key, see Remote con‐
Four-wheel drive 127 trol 32
Front airbags 103 H Ignition off 67
Front-end collision warning Ignition on 67
with braking function 114 Handbrake, see Parking Important considerations 60
brake 71
259
Important information regard‐ Interior lights via remote con‐ Laying up, vehicle 237
ing the engine compart‐ trol 36 Leather, care 235
ment 206 Interior movement detec‐ LEDs, light-emitting di‐
Independent ventilation 159 tor 44 odes 216
Indication of a flat Interval display, service re‐ Left-hand traffic, light set‐
tyre 107, 109 quirement 87 ting 101
Indicator and hazard warning ISOFIX child seat mount‐ Light alloy wheels, care 236
lights, see Check control 81 ings 62 Light-emitting diodes,
Indicator lights, see Check LEDs 216
control 81 J Lighter 160
Indicators, see Turn indica‐ Lighting 97
tors 72 Jack mounting points 224 Lighting via remote con‐
Individual air distribu‐ Journey computer 92 trol 36
tion 154, 157 Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐ Lights 97
Individual settings, see Per‐ sion 76 Lights and light bulbs 216
sonal Profile 33 Jump-starting connection, Light switch 97
Inflation pressure, tyres 198 starting assistance 229 LIM button, see Speed limit,
Inflation pressure warning Jump starting, see starting adjustable 122
RPA, tyres 109 assistance 228 Loads 177
Info Display, see On-board Lock, door 37
computer 91 K Locking/unlocking using door
Information 6 lock 37
Information on no passing 89 Key/remote control 32 Locking/unlocking with re‐
Information on speed limit 89 Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐ mote control 35
Initialise, Tyre Pressure Moni‐ cess 40 Locking, automatic 43
tor TPM 106 Key memory, see Personal Locking, doors and win‐
Initialising, runflat indicator, Profile 33 dows 66
RPA 109 Key switch for front passen‐ Locking settings 42
Instrument cluster 80 ger airbags 105 Lock, wheel studs 224
Instrument cluster, electronic Kick-down, Steptronic trans‐ Low-beam headlights 97
displays 80 mission 76 Lower back support 51
Instrument cluster switch, see Luggage net 164
Turn indicators 72 L Luggage rack, see Roof
Instrument cluster switch, see rack 178
Wipers 72 Label, run-flat tyres 201 Lumbar support 51
Instrument lighting 101 Lane boundary, warning 119
Integrated key 32 Lane change warning 121 M
Integrated Owner's Lane departure warning 119
Handbook in vehicle 27 Language, on the control dis‐ Maintenance 212
Intelligent emergency play 94 Maintenance require‐
call 227 Lashing eyes, securing ment 212
Intelligent Safety 111 load 177 Maintenance, service require‐
Intensity, AUTO Automatic Lashing straps, securing ment 87
program 156 load 177 Maintenance System
Interior light 101 Launch Control 78 BMW 212
Laying up out of use 237
260
Malfunction displays, see Multifunction steering wheel, Opening/closing using door

Check control 81 buttons 12 lock 37
Manual air distribu‐ Opening and closing 32
tion 154, 157 N Opening and closing, without
Manual air flow 154, 157 remote control 37
Manual gearbox 75 Navigation, see Owner's Opening and closing with re‐
Manual operation, door Handbook for Navigation, mote control 35
lock 37 Entertainment, Communica‐ Operating menus, iDrive 16
Manual operation, exterior tion Operating principle, iDrive 16
mirrors 57 Neutral cleaner, see rim Outside air, see AUC 157
Manual operation, fuel filler cleaner 236 Outside temperature dis‐
flap 194 New wheels and tyres 200 play 85
Manual operation, Park Dis‐ No Passing Information 89 Outside temperature warn‐
tance Control, PDC 141 Nose weight 247 ing 85
Manual operation, rear-view Nylon ropes for tow-starting/ Overheating of the engine,
camera 144 towing 231 see Coolant temperature 85
Manual operation, Side
View 146 O P
Manual operation, Top
View 148 OBD, see on-board diagnosis Paintwork, vehicle 235
Manual shift mode, Step‐ OBD 214 Panorama Glass Roof 46
tronic transmission 77 Obstacle marking, rear-view Park assistant 149
Markings on approved camera 145 Park Distance Control,
tyres 200 Octane number, see Petrol PDC 140
Maximum cooling effect 156 grade 196 Parked vehicle, conden‐
Memory, seat, mirror 56 Odometer 85 sate 176
Menu in the instrument clus‐ Office, see Owner's Parking aid, see PDC 140
ter 90 Handbook for Navigation, Parking assistant 149
Menus, see iDrive operating Entertainment, Communica‐ Parking brake 71
principle 18 tion Parking lights 98
Messages, see Check con‐ Oil 208 Particle filter 175
trol 81 Oil additives 209 Part replacement 215
Microfilter 155, 158 Oil change 210 Parts and accessories 7
Minimum tread depth, Oil change interval, service Passenger's mirror, tilting
tyres 199 requirement 87 down 58
Mirror, memory 56 Oil filler neck 209 PDC Park Distance Con‐
Mirrors 57 Oil grades, alternative 210 trol 140
Mobile communication equip‐ Oil grades, approved 210 Permitted gross weight while
ment 175 Oil grades, prescribed 210 towing a trailer 247
Mobile service 228 Old battery, disposing 225 Personal data, delete 22
Mobility system 202 On-board computer 91 Personal Profile 33
Moisture in the headlight 216 On-board diagnosis Personal profile, export pro‐
Monitor, see Control dis‐ OBD 214 file 34
play 16 On-board monitor, see Con‐ Personal profile, import pro‐
Mounting child restraints 61 trol display 16 file 35
On-board toolkit 215
261
Person warning with city Rear-view mirror, manual- Rim cleaner 236
braking function 117 dim 58 RME, rape seed methyl es‐
Petrol 196 Rear window 39 ter 196
Petrol grade 196 Recirculated-air Roller cover 162
Place for children 60 mode 154, 157 Roller sunblinds 46
Plasters, see First-aid kit 228 Recirculating air filter 158 Rolling away in idle, coast‐
Plastic, care 236 Recirculation, see Recircula‐ ing 188
Pockets in the doors 167 ted-air mode 154, 157 RON petrol grade 196
Power failure 225 Recommended tyre Roof load 240
Power windows 44 makes 200 Roof rack 178
Pressure check, tyres 106 Recycling 214 Rope for tow-starting/
Pressure, tyres 198 Refuelling 194 towing 231
Pressure warning RPA, Remaining distance 86 Route-ahead assistant 187
tyres 109 Remedying punctures 201 RPA runflat indicator 109
Profiles, Personal Profile 33 Remote control/key 32 RSC Runflat System Compo‐
Protection function, Glass Remote control, malfunc‐ nent, see Run-flat tyres 201
Roof 47 tion 36 Rubber parts, care 236
Protection function, win‐ Replacement fuse 225 Runflat indicator RPA 109
dows 45 Replacement of parts 215 Run-flat tyres 201
Puncture, runflat indicator Replacement of wheels/ Running in 174
RPA 109 tyres 200 Running in brake discs 174
Replacing bulbs 216 Running in brake pads 174
R Replacing bulbs, front 217
Replacing parts 215 S
Radio-control key, see Re‐ Replacing the battery, vehicle
mote control 32 battery 224 Safe seated position 49
Radio ready state 68 Replacing the battery, vehicle Safety package, see Active
Radio, see Owner's remote control 33 Protection 124
Handbook for Navigation, Replacing wiper blades 215 Safety switch, windows 46
Entertainment, Communica‐ RES button 135 Safety systems, airbags 103
tion RES button, see Active Saving fuel 183
Radio signals 175 Cruise Control, ACC 132 Saving settings for seat, mir‐
Rain sensor 73 RES button, see Cruise Con‐ ror 56
Range 86 trol 138 Screen, see Control dis‐
Rape seed methyl ester, Reserve warning, see play 16
RME 196 Range 86 Screwdriver, see On-board
Readiness service, see mo‐ Reset, Tyre Pressure Monitor toolkit 215
bile service 228 TPM 106 Screw thread, see Thread for
Rear fog lights 100 Restraint systems for chil‐ towing eye 232
Rear head restraints 55 dren 60 Sealing compound 202
Rear lights 221, 223 Retreaded tyres 200 Seat and mirror memory 56
Rear neck supports, see Head Reuse 214 Seat belt reminder for driver's
restraints 55 Reversing light 221 and front passenger's
Rear-view camera 143 Revolution counter 85 seat 54
Rear-view mirror, automatic- Right-hand traffic, light set‐ Seat belt reminder for rear
dim 58 ting 101 seats 54
262
Seat belts 52 Entertainment, Communica‐ Status of the Owner's

Seat belts, care 236 tion Handbook 7
Seat heating, front 52 Spanner, see On-board tool‐ Steering support 130
Seat heating, rear 52 kit 215 Steering wheel, adjusting 59
Seats 49 Spare fuse 225 Steering wheel heating 59
Securing load 177 Special equipment, standard Steptronic Sport transmis‐
Selection list in the instru‐ equipment 6 sion 77
ment cluster 90 Special ID, remote control 33 Steptronic transmission 75
Selector lever, Steptronic Speed, displaying maxi‐ Stopping the engine 69
transmission 76 mum 89 Storage compartment in the
Sensors, care 237 Speed limit, can be set 122 rear 168
Service history 88 Speed limit device, see Storage compartments 166
Service, mobile 228 Speed limit 122 Storage options 166
Service requirement, Condi‐ Speed Limit Information 89 Storage, tyres 201
tion Based Service Speed limit information, on- Storage, vehicle 237
CBS 212 board computer 92 Summer tyres, tread 199
Service requirement, dis‐ Speed limit that can be Sunblinds, sun guard 46
play 87 set 122 Sun visor 160
Services, ConnectedDrive Speed warning 92 Supplementary text mes‐
Servotronic 130 Split-screen 21 sage 84
Settings, locking/unlock‐ Split-screen view, split- Surround view 143
ing 42 screen 21 Swinging of the trailer, see
Settings on the control dis‐ SPORT+ program, driving dy‐ Trailer Stability Control 181
play 93 namics 129 Switches, see Driving area 12
Settings, seats/head re‐ Sport displays, torque dis‐ Switch for driving dynam‐
straints 49 play, power display 92 ics 128
Shift paddles on the steering SPORT program, driving dy‐ Switching off the engine 69
wheel 77 namics 129 Switch-on times, independ‐
Shift point indicator 88 Sport program, transmis‐ ent ventilation 159
Side airbags 103 sion 77 Symbols 6
Side lights 97 Sports steering, variable 128 Symbols in the status field 21
Side View 146 Stability control systems 126 Symbols used 6
Signals on unlocking 43 Start/stop button 67
Sliding/tilting roof 46 Start function with malfunc‐ T
Smallest turning circle 240 tion 33
Snow chains 205 Starting assistance 228 Tailgate, automatic 38
Socket 161 Starting assistance, see Tailgate, closing contact‐
Socket in rear passenger DSC 126 lessly 41
compartment 161 Starting, see Engine start 68 Tailgate, opening contact‐
Socket, on-board diagnosis Starting the engine 68 lessly 41
OBD 214 Starting the engine, starting Tailgate via remote con‐
Soot particle filter 175 assistance 228 trol 36
SOS button 227 Status control display, Tank display 85
Sound, see Owner's tyres 106 Technical changes, see Your
Handbook for Navigation, Status information, iDrive 21 own safety 7
Technical data 240
263
Telephone, see Owner's Tread, tyres 199 Vehicle equipment 6

Handbook for Navigation, Trip distance recorder 85 Vehicle for tow-starting/
Entertainment, Communica‐ Triple turn signal 72 towing 230
tion Turn indicator rear, changing Vehicle identification num‐
Temperature, automatic air bulb 221 ber 8
conditioning 154, 156 Turn indicators, operation 72 Vehicle paintwork 235
Temperature display, outside Turning circle 240 Vehicle, running in 174
temperature 85 Turning circle lines, rear-view Ventilation 158
Temperature, engine oil 85 camera 144 Ventilation, see Independent
Tensioning bands, securing Tyre damage 199 ventilation 159
load 177 Tyre inflation pressure moni‐ VIN, see Vehicle identification
Text message, supplemen‐ tor, TPM 106 number 8
tary 84 Tyre pressure monitoring, see Voice control system 24
Thiefproof wheel studs 224 RPA 109
Thigh support 51 Tyre Pressure Monitor W
Thread for towing eye 232 TPM 106
Tilt alarm sensor 44 Tyre pressures 198 Wading 175
Tilting down, passenger's Tyre replacement 200 Warning indicators, see
mirror 58 Tyre sealant 202 Check control 81
Tool 215 Tyres, everything about Warning messages, see
Topping up engine oil 209 wheels and tyres 198 Check control 81
Top speed, winter tyres 201 Tyre tread 199 Warning triangle 228
Top View 147 Washer fluid 75
Total weight 240 U Washer jets, windows 74
Total weight, permitted 240 Washing the car 234
Touchpad 19 Units of measure 94 Water on roads 175
Tourist function, see Left- Unloaded weight 240 Weights 240
hand/right-hand traffic 101 Unlock-button, Steptronic Welcome lights 97
Tow eye, see Towing transmission 76 Wheelbase, vehicle 240
eye 232 Unlocking/locking using door Wheel change 224
Towing 230 lock 37 Wheel replacement 200
Towing a trailer 179 Unlocking/locking with re‐ Wheels, everything about
Towing eye 232 mote control 35 wheels and tyres 198
Towing truck 230 Unlocking, settings 42 Wheels, run flat indicator
Tow-starting 230 Updates after going to RPA 109
TPM Tyre Pressure Moni‐ press 7 Width, vehicle 240
tor 106 Upholstery care 236 Windscreen washer jets 74
Traction control 127 USB interface 162 Windscreen washing sys‐
TRACTION, driving dynam‐ tem 72
ics 127 V Windscreen wipers 72
Trailer loads 247 Winter-grade diesel 197
Trailer Stability Control 181 Vanity mirror 160 Winter storage, care and
Trailer tow hitch 181 Variable sports steering 128 maintenance 237
Trailer towing, data 247 Vehicle battery 224 Winter tyres, right tyres 200
Transmission lockout, un‐ Vehicle battery, chang‐ Winter tyres, tread 199
locking electronically 78 ing 224 Wiper, fold-out position 74
264
Wiper system 72
Wood, care 236
Wordmatch principle, naviga‐
tion 23
Working in the engine com‐
partment 206
X
xDrive 127
Xenon light, bulb change 219
Y
Your own safety 7
265
More about BMW
The Ultimate
www.bmw.com Driving Machine
01 40 2 956 728 en
*BL295672800T*

MANUAL

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

MANUAL

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MANUAL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents Owner's Handbook

A-Z The Ultimate

THE BMW 3 SERIES

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 956 728 - X/14

The Owner's Handbook is available as an app in many coun‐

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 956 728 - X/14

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 956 728 - X/14

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 956 728 - X/14

Status of the Owner's Your own safety

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 956 728 - X/14

Around the steering wheel

1 Safety switch for window in rear passenger 5 Lights

Lane departure warning 119

Automatic driving lights con‐ Increase distance 135

Headlight beam throw adjust‐

6 Steering-column lever, left

Telephone, see Owner's

On-board computer 91 Rain sensor 73

Cleaning the windows and head‐

Resume speed 140, 132

14 Steering wheel adjustment 59

16 Unlock bonnet 206

Around the centre console

1 Control display 16 9 Park Distance Control,

3 hazard warning lights 227 Rear view camera 143

Side View 146

Around the headlining

1 Intelligent emergency call 227 4 Reading lights 101

2 Panorama Glass Roof 46 5 Interior light 101

3 Front passenger airbag indicator

This chapter describes all standard, national Information

1. Press the button.

Controller with navigation system

1. Turning. Press the but‐ Function

TEL Calls up the Telephone

BACK Displays the previous screen.

OPTION Calls up the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

3. Tilting in four directions.

Buttons on the Controller

Press the but‐ Function

MENU Calls up the main menu.

RADIO Calls up the Radio menu.

MEDIA Calls up the multimedia

NAV Calls up the Navigation

Buttons on the Controller Selecting a menu item

AUDIO Calls up last heard audio

TEL Calls up the Telephone

BACK Call up previous table.

OPTION Calls up the Options menu.

Menu items in the Owner's Handbook

View of an opened menu

Calling up the Options menu Enabling/disabling functions

Alternatively, tilt the Controller repeatedly to Select functions

Move interactive map or Gesture in the ap‐

Enlarge/reduce interac‐ Pinch or open up

Adjusting the settings

6. Turn the Controller to set the hour and Symbol Meaning

Text message received.